JP2020096926A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving further novel amusement in a game machine adopting a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine is configured such that an expectation value relating to the number of winning balls given to a player by execution of a small win game per unit time becomes larger than the number of shot game balls per the unit time in a special pattern time-shortening first state under the same condition while an expectation value relating to the number of winning balls given to the player by execution of a small win game per unit time is smaller than the number of shot game balls per the unit time in a special pattern time-shortening first state when the game balls are shot toward a special pattern start pocket at a predetermined interval.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 95

Description

Pachinko game machines.

In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered by a game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (gaming area), and if a jackpot (special game ) Transition to the state, the mainstream Pachinko machine that can win a large number of prize balls to open the big winning opening provided on the game board surface. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, the probability variation game state that raises the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and the time shortening game state that raises the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that is provided with the above-mentioned, etc. and enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progressing state that is advantageous to the player by these gaming states.

JP, 2005-313674, A JP, 2011-45518, A JP, 2008-167875, A

However, since there have been many such gaming machines from the past, there is a problem that the development of a model that realizes a more novel gaming property is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, it is compared to when it is displaced to the closed state. Then, the game ball can be easily or can enter the predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is predetermined compared to when it is displaced to the open state. A ball inlet (for example, a variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured such that the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the second main game starting port B10,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information is provided,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) or the identification. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening opening game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until the period has elapsed, by executing a unit game once. With special game control means,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific game state in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game becomes the normal game state. Is configured,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A of the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the specific condition can be satisfied,
In the pachinko game machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B of the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the specific condition is not satisfied. is there.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a more novel gaming property in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the prefetch effect execution determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is an effect contents determination table configuration diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a diagram exemplifying an opening pattern of the special winning opening on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the start demonstration effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is an operation diagram of the second special winning opening C20 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the lower shield member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the V-winning prize detection effect display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a small hit game related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is an operation diagram relating to winning at the V winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the symbol display processing on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. 88 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 92 is an operation diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit related time saving end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of a small hit related time saving end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a table relating to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification 4 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a table relating to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an example of the electric accessory release time applicable to the pachinko game machine according to this example. FIG. 106 is an example of a case where the small hit is won in the final variation of the time-saving game state applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example. FIG. 107 is an example of a notice effect applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present example.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only winning in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. And the like. In addition, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game pattern/special pattern (special drawing) or a decorative pattern (design), but the "special pattern (special drawing)" is a main control board. The display information is identification information controlled by the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The "display of identification information" is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission of a light emitting means (eg, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only light emission but also color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. The “draft” refers to display contents that enhance the interest of the game, and includes, for example, moving images and pictures such as identification information fluctuations/stops and advance notices, animations and live images, still images such as photographs, characters, and the like. A combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an advancing state) and a state retracted in the game board (opposite side to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In a configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker) that can take advantage of the above, there is an advancing state = easy winning state, and a withdrawal state = non-winning state. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in the Pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to random numbers in the narrow sense (for example, as random numbers, hard Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning/winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers including the winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number... Is called one random number). .. Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability variation game state with a high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notification of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. "Expected average execution time of easy-entering ball game per unit time" is assumed to be a situation in which the symbol variation of the auxiliary game symbol is continuously performed (for example, the situation in which a hold relating to the auxiliary game symbol is always present). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example, , If the variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function operating state/non-operating state), the winning of the normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of the variable member High and low probability (so-called general figure high probability lottery state / low probability lottery state), the length of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of the variable member (so-called general pattern fluctuation shortening function inactive state / operating state) ), etc. are realized by any one or a plurality of combinations. The “average value of the variable display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, when the variable display period is configured to be determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (sum of "selection probability x variable display period"), but if there is only one type of variable display period that should be selected, then Is the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss or a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variation display period with the highest selection probability It should be added that the concept is limited to, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index indicating the progressing speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, "the variation display period of the identification information As a method of realizing different "average values", different candidates and/or selection probabilities of the variable display period are added, or further variable display periods are added even if the candidates and/or selection probabilities of the variable display period are the same. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing, but it is not limited to either method). "The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period is the second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is different from the first period. At least having a variable period state," means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, according to the number of times the identification information fluctuates and is displayed, a state transition of “first fluctuation period state”→“second fluctuation period state”→“third fluctuation period state” is performed. Including what can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured such that “first variation period state”<“second variation period state”<“third variation period state”, It is possible to build a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability variation game state that continues until the next big hit + the electric Chu specific game state (the next big hit cannot be obtained despite the fact that the next big hit will be deterministic) As the situation continues, the speed of the game progresses, so it may be possible to eliminate the feeling of fatigue at the time of so-called hamari). Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the "first variation period state", the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, " In the "third variation period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second variation period state", between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting. In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information particularly at the time of loss tends to be relatively long compared to the “first fluctuation period state” ( In other words, in the "second variation period state", the variation display period of the identification information is particularly long during the hit, as compared to other states, in which variation or suggestion of a hit or reach is likely to occur. Easy {that is, the fluctuation display period for short fluctuation loss that makes definite loss or the fluctuation display period for medium fluctuation loss that suggests a hit is not selected (or difficult to select), but fluctuation display for reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation) It is possible to exemplify that it has a characteristic such that only the period is selected (or easily selected)}. The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game" may be a period immediately after the end of the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol variations, or the special game. It may be a period from one or a plurality of times after the change of the symbol is made to the time when the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (that is, the high-probability lottery state is maintained after the end of the execution of the special game). If it is within the range, it means that it is any period within that range, so the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" In the case where the state transitions of and can be taken, the specific period can mean the stay period of the “first variable period state” and/or the “second variable period state”). "When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the information about the hold" means, for example, that a special game (so-called big hit game) is likely to occur when the hold is exhausted, but there is a possibility that the special game will occur. The judgment criteria are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning or losing lottery)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number value such as a "winning symbol determination random number" for deciding whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for determination, and the content of an event derived from these random number values (results of determination , The length of the fluctuation time, the type of the stopped symbol, the possibility of shifting to the specific game, etc.) may be used as the criterion. In the case of suggesting, "indicating or notifying the existence of the hold" is, for example, an effect at the time when the hold is exhausted until reaching the hold (a pattern variation mode of the decorative pattern or it is performed in conjunction with it). Changing the execution mode of (background effect, etc.), etc., and when informing, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator (may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) at the time of the hold occurrence. (In that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the hold generation sound or the sound such as BGM is changed at the time of the hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the hold occurrence. Changing the lighting mode of (frame lamp, etc.), or the execution mode of other effects (symbol variation mode of decorative symbols, background effects performed in conjunction with it, etc.) that are executed at the time of the hold occurrence Can be changed.

The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko game machines such as general electric officer). .. Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, modifications to one embodiment should be understood to be modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa. Further, in the present example, the term “table” is not limited to that format, and one or more selection candidates may be selected from the plurality of selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that it is a mode that is associated. Furthermore, a numerical value (for example, a winning probability at the time of executing a lottery, a maximum number of rounds at a special game, a symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc.) as a specific example shown in the following embodiments and modifications, This is just an example, and particularly under different conditions (for example, the first main game side and the second main game side).
By the condition with the main game side, by the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game condition, by the time reduction game and the non-time reduction game condition, etc.) It should be understood that appropriate modifications may be made without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. For example, in the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship in the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is the first main game side=the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be appropriately changed such that the first main game side<the second main game side, or the first main game side>the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). In addition, for example, as the number of times of continuation of the probability variation game state, when configuring based on the idea that it continues until the next big hit occurs, is "65535" set as the number of times of continuation (configured to substantially continue), Alternatively, the probability variation game state is maintained until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of times of continuation, even in the choice of the realization method based on the same purpose, as long as it does not largely deviate from the purpose of the following embodiment or modification. Should be understood to be appropriately changed.

Here, a configuration applicable to the pachinko game according to this example is shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. Further, the following concepts can be extracted (listed) from the configurations shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the embodiments described later is added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be. The time-saving game state according to this example may be that the main game time saving flag is on, or the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, that is, the time saving game state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is operating, and the non-time reduction game state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not operating.

The pachinko game machine according to the present example may be configured to enter a specific area C22 during a big hit so as to shift to a probability variation game state after the big hit ends (also referred to as a ball making machine), and a concept based on the structure. as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first big winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning port can enter the ball,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A win/fail judgment means for executing a win/no judgment based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means,
Identification information display content deciding means for deciding stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit/miss judgment by the hit/miss judgment means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means, after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20), the stop of the identification information is controlled to be stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means,
If the result of the hit/no hit determination by the hit/no hit determination means is a win, and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed in the identification information display section is the specific stop identification information belonging to a specific group, a special game advantageous to the player Special game control means to be executed,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10) than the normal game state, and is controlled to be the specific game state after the end of execution of the special game. And a game state transition control means capable of
Having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
Having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as the specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Whichever of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Whichever of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When one of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed Then, the execution contents of the special game are configured to be different from each other,
During the execution of the special game, the variable winning a prize opening (eg, the first special winning opening C10) is present until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning entrance (eg, the first large winning opening C10) or a predetermined time elapses. ) Is possible for the player to execute a unit game,
Ease of entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is more specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in a unit game of a corresponding special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the symbol variation on the second main game side is more advantageous to the player than the symbol variation on the first main game side, and as a concept based on the configuration ,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (2),
It relates to the number of prize balls that a player can obtain by a special game when the result of the winning/judging determination by the second winning/unwinning determination means is a win and the stop identification information of the second identification information is the specific stop identification information belonging to a specific group. The expected value is obtained by the player by a special game when the result of the hit/no hit judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means is a win and the stop identification information of the first identification information is the specific stop identification information belonging to a specific group. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so as to be relatively larger than an expected value relating to the number of possible prize balls.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the second main game-side hold is given priority over the first main-game-side hold, and the concept based on this structure is as follows:
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (3),
When the second hold is present, the first hit/fail judgment permission condition is not satisfied, while the second hit/fail judgment permission condition is satisfied regardless of whether the first hold is present. It is a pachinko machine characterized by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the jackpot on the second main game side is more likely to hit the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round than the jackpot on the first main game side. However, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (4),
In the case where the result of the success/failure determination by the second win/defeat determination means is a win and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the win/fail determination by the first win/failure determination means is a win The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is relatively easily stopped and displayed as compared with the case where the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the variation mode determination table to be referred to after the big hit is different, even if it is the big hit according to the same big hit pattern, depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22 during the big hit. , As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5),
A first variation pattern table as a table to be referred when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and a second variation pattern table in which the first variation pattern table is different in the selection tendency of the variation display time of the second identification information. Having at least the following, after the execution of the special game, it can be controlled to be either the first fluctuation period state referring to the first fluctuation pattern table or the second fluctuation period state referring to the second fluctuation pattern table. And a variable period state control means,
When there is a ball in a specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation period While in the state,
When there is no ball in the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second variation period It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured to be in a state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the selection tendency of the variation mode determination table referred to after the big hit is different depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22, even if it is the big hit according to the same big hit symbol. , As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (6),
There is at least a first variation pattern table as a table that is referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, and a second variation pattern table having a different tendency of selecting the variation display time of the identification information from the first variation pattern table. However, after the execution of the special game, the variable period state control that can be controlled to be either the first variable period state referring to the first variation pattern table or the second variation period state referring to the second variation pattern table And means,
When there is a ball in a specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation period While in the state,
When there is no ball in the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second variation period Is configured to
As a table that is referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, further has a third variation pattern table with different selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information from both the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table,
From the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display as one unit, if a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group has entered a specific area in the special game, the special After the one unit has been played a predetermined number of times after the end of the execution of the game, the first variation period state referring to the first variation pattern table is changed to the third variation period state referring to the third variation pattern table. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured so that whether to enter the specific area C22 or not, even if it is a big hit according to the same big hit symbol, whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit is configured differently. Well, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (7),
It is determined whether or not to be in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, depending on whether or not a specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is entered. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to have different performance tendencies after the big hit depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22, even if it is the big hit according to the same big hit design. Is a stage that is dependent upon controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect displayed when the stay stage is different (type of notice effect that can be executed, background effect that can be executed). The type, the execution frequency of the noticeable effect that can be executed, the execution frequency of the background effect that can be executed, etc.) are different. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8),
As a production mode that depends upon controlling the production display content displayed on the production display unit, the first production mode and the first production mode have a second production mode in which the production display content is different,
When there is a ball in a specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game, and the first effect mode is set. While doing
When there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game, and the second effect mode is set. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to always enter the time shortening game state after the big hit in the big hit related to the predetermined big hit pattern, regardless of whether or not to enter the specific area C22. As a concept based on composition,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (9),
Regardless of whether a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group has entered a specific area in a unit game, it is definite that the specific game state is set after the execution of the special game. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the number of shortening times after the big hit is different, even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit design, depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (10),
When the special game state is reached after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display,
When there is a ball in a specific area in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the one unit is the first number of times after the end of execution of the special game. It is configured so that the specific game state is maintained until it is told,
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the one unit is the second number of times after the execution of the special game. It is configured so that the specific game state is maintained until it is told,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first number is configured to be larger than the second number.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the tendency of the variation time in the final variation of the time-saving game state is different depending on whether to enter the specific area (for example, before the final variation, the shortest variation time at the time of loss) Although it is the same, the final fluctuation may differ in the shortest fluctuation time at the time of loss), and as a concept based on the structure,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (11),
In the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, if there is a ball into the specific area, in the final round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game, The average value of the variable display period of the second identification information when the result of the winning/judgment determination by the second winning/unjudging determination means is non-winning is configured to be the average value A,
If there is no entry into the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, in the final round of the specific game state after the execution of the special game, The average value of the variable display period of the second identification information when the result of the determination of success by the second determination means is non-win is the average value B which is a value different from the average value A. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the effect contents in the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state are different depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (12),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display productions,
A sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state,
From the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one unit, and when it is in the specific game state, after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a predetermined number, it is controllable to be in the normal game state. ,
It is configured to be in a specific game state after the end of the special game,
When there is a ball in a specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the final display of the specific game state after the execution of the special game is finished. The content is configured to be the effect display content A,
When there is no entry to the specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, the final display of the specific game state after the end of the execution of the special game The content is configured to be effect display content B which is effect display content different from effect display content A, which is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a gaming machine that enters a specific area C22 during a big hit and shifts to a probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends, and a predetermined period after the time shortening gaming state is in a limited frequency state {Do not select a variation time longer than a predetermined time (for example, a variation time corresponding to a symbol variation in which a pseudo continuous variation that is a variation time selection candidate is executed) (a pseudo continuous variation is a decorative pattern in one pattern variation. The temporary stop display is executed a plurality of times, and it is a change that makes the player appear as if a plurality of symbol changes are being executed.)} may be configured, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (13),
Regardless of whether a particular area (for example, the specific area C22) in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group has entered, the normal state is changed from the specific game state after the execution of the special game. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the variable display time of the identification information is configured not to be longer than a specific time from the time when the game state is entered until the one unit is performed a specific number of times.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, regardless of whether or not to enter the specific area C22, in the big hit according to the same big hit symbol, after the time shortening game state that rushes after the big hit ends, shifts to the limited frequency state (the limitation. Even if a big hit occurs in the frequency state, it may be considered as continuous villa continuation), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (14),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state,
The unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is set as one unit, and when the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number in the specific game state, it is configured to be controllable to the normal game state. Cage,
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second variation is the second period in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is different from the first period. Is configured to have at least a period state,
At the time of executing a certain special game, it is configured to be in a specific game state after the end of execution of the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area.
When the number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number after the specific game state, the normal game state and the first variation period state are set,
It is possible to control from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display to be one unit, and after the number of repetitions of the one unit has reached a predetermined number in the case of the first variable period state, the state is changed to the second variable period state. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured as follows.

Even if the pachinko gaming machine according to this example enters the specific area C22 with a big hit related to the same big hit pattern, the start demo time and/or the end demo time is different depending on the game state at the time of big hit (start The output mode of the external terminal signal related to the demo time and/or the external terminal signal related to the end demo time may be different). In the case of a short open big hit, the end demo time may be the same regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit, or the difference between the end demo times may be relatively small. As a concept based on the structure Is
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (15),
In the normal game state, the identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, and the special game is executed in the unit game, the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered. If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured to be the first period,
When the identification information is in the specific game state, the identification information is stopped and displayed by the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group, and the special area is entered in the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in the unit game. If there is a ball, the special game end demo period corresponding to the special game is configured to be the second period,
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first period is configured to be longer than the second period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured to have different end demo time values (start demo time value does not change) even if it is a big hit related to the same big hit design, depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. Well, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (16),
Demonstration of the end of the special game depending on whether there is a ball entering a specific area in the unit game in the special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group or not. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the periods are different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured to have different contents of the end demonstration effect (the start demonstration effect is unchanged) even if the same big hit symbol is a big hit depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22. Well, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (17),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display productions,
A sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
As a state related to the game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state with a higher profit than the normal game state,
At the time of executing a certain special game, depending on whether there is a ball entering a specific area and when there is no ball entering a specific area, the effect display contents in the special game end demo period (for example, the second embodiment It is the pachinko game machine characterized in that the continuous game continuous image, the continuous game end image), which is the effect at the special game end demo time in the modified example 1 from FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a first main game length open big hit (a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round on the first main game side) and a second main game length open big hit (first 2 The tendency of the start demonstration effect is different between the big hit which makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round on the main game side). For example, in the first main game long open big hit, "long open confirmation notification effect (effect that notifies that the second special winning opening C20 is long open in the special game being executed)" and "long open presence/absence non-notification effect ( In the special game that is being executed, the second special winning opening C20 does not notify whether the long opening or short opening is performed)”, but in the second main game long opening big hit, “long opening confirmed Only one kind of display of "notification effect" can be displayed, that is, the display selection rate of "long open confirmation notification effect" is different), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (18),
As the effect display contents performed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) during the start demonstration period of the special game, there are plural kinds of effect display contents,
In the special game start demonstration period corresponding to the special game in the case where the result of the hit/damage determination by the first hit/miss determination means is a win and the stop identification information of the first identification information is the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group The tendency of the effect display content performed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) and the result of the hit/no hit judgment by the second hit/no hit determination means are wins, and the stop identification information of the second identification information is the first identification. It is configured so that the tendency of the effect display content performed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) in the special game start demonstration period corresponding to the special game when the specific stop identification information belonging to the group is different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by having.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a long open big hit (a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) and a short open big hit (makes it difficult to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round). It may be configured such that the output mode of the external terminal signal at the time of entering the specific area C22 is different between the big hit) and the concept based on the configuration.
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (19),
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
As a special game, it has at least a special easy-to-enter special game and a special difficult-to-enter game that is more difficult to enter a specific area during the special game than the special easy-to-enter game
As the external output information to be output from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside, the first information and the second information different from the first information are configured to be output,
The first information and the second information are configured to be output upon entry of a ball into a specific area during execution of a special game,
It is configured such that the first information is output when a specific area is entered during execution of a special game for easy entry.
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the second information is output when a specific area is entered during execution of a special game that is difficult to enter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has a shielding member (open state and closed state depending on the big hit pattern, in the open state it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area C22, and in the closed state, it is specified. There is a different opening mode of the member that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the area C22) (open at least once, there is a timing that becomes open regardless of the big hit symbol, and a specific area from the distribution game execution round start timing) The time between the opening start timing and the time from the distribution game execution round end timing to the specific area closing timing may be shorter in the former case, etc.), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (20),
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning port can enter,
A variable member provided in the variable winning opening, the distribution variable member being displaced to an inhibition position that inhibits the ball entering the specific area and a non-inhibition position that does not inhibit the ball entering the specific area. Equipped with
As a special game, at least a first special game and a second special game different from the first special game,
Displacement mode of the distribution variable member (for example, lower shield member C25) during execution of the first special game and displacement mode of the distribution variable member during execution of the second special game are different. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the count number or the number of prize balls differs depending on the special winning opening, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (21),
A first variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
With a second variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
If the result of the win/no determination is a win, it is configured to execute a special game in which the first variable winning port and/or the second variable winning port can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute a unit game that is in a state multiple times,
The predetermined number that the unit game related to the first variable winning opening is ended and the predetermined number that the unit game related to the second variable winning opening is ended are different, or to the first variable winning opening Number of prize balls when entering (for example, 15 balls that are the number of prize balls of the first big winning opening in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment) and number of prize balls when entering the second variable winning opening (For example, 13 balls which is the number of prize balls of the second special winning opening in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment) is configured to be different from each other, and is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to always continue until the sorting game execution round, regardless of which big hit, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (22),
A first variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
A second variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter,
If the result of the win/no determination is a win, it is configured to execute a special game in which the first variable winning port and/or the second variable winning port can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute a unit game that is in a state multiple times,
As a special game, it has at least a first special game and a second special game in which the number of unit games executed is different from that of the first special game,
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game (for example, the 4R which is the distribution game execution round), the second variable winning a prize opening is configured to open,
In both the first special game and the second special game, the number of unit games to be executed is configured to be the predetermined number of times or more, which is a pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the time from the end of the round immediately before the distribution game execution round to the start of the distribution game execution round is different between the first main game length open big hit and the second main game length open big hit. You may comprise so that the tendency of the closing time of the special winning opening during a predetermined round may differ. In addition, it may be configured to execute promotion effects (effects that inspire whether the current big hit is long open big hit or short open big hit) in a round before the distribution game execution round, and a concept based on the structure as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (23),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A first variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A second variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/win determination or the second win/win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the first variable winning a prize opening and/or Or a special game control means for executing a special game that can bring the second variable winning a prize mouth into an advantageous state for the player,
Of the special games to be executed when the result of the first win/fail judgment is a win, the first easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning/absence determination is a win, the second easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute a unit game that is in a state multiple times,
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game, the second variable winning opening is configured to open,
From the timing when the last first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening in the unit game immediately before the predetermined number of unit games changes from the open state to the closed state, the first second in the unit game of the predetermined number of times When the predetermined unit game preparation period is from the time when the variable winning opening is closed to when it is opened, the predetermined unit game preparation period in the first easy-to-enter special game and the predetermined unit game in the second easy-to-enter special game It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the time value is different from the preparation period.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the first main game length open big hit (big hit that makes it easier to enter the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round on the first main game side) is the second main game length open It may be configured such that there are more rounds that are short-opened than jackpots (jackets that make it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round on the second main game side), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (24),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A first variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A second variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/win determination or the second win/win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the first variable winning a prize opening and/or Or a special game control means for executing a special game that can bring the second variable winning a prize mouth into an advantageous state for the player,
Of the special games to be executed when the result of the first win/fail judgment is a win, the first easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning/absence determination is a win, the second easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute a unit game that is in a state multiple times,
In the unit game of the predetermined number of times in the special game, the second variable winning opening is configured to open,
From the timing at which the last first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening in the unit game immediately before the predetermined number of unit games changes from the open state to the closed state, the first second in the unit game of the predetermined number of times When the variable winning opening is set from the closed state to the open state as the predetermined unit game preparation period (for example, the distribution game start demonstration time in the second modification from the second embodiment), the first ball is easily inserted. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the predetermined unit game preparation period in the special game and the predetermined unit game preparation period in the second easy-to-enter special game are configured to have different time values.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the average value of the number of execution rounds is the same for the big hit on the first main game side and the big hit on the second main game side, and as a concept based on the structure ,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (25),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
With a variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determining means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display part. Prepare,
If the result of the first winning/non-winning judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit, a first special game that can make the variable winning a prize state advantageous for the player is executed. Is configured as
When the result of the second winning/non-winning judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the second identification information display unit, a second special game that can make the variable winning a prize state advantageous for the player is executed. Is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
As the first special game, there are multiple types of special games with different numbers of unit games to be executed,
As a second special game, it has multiple types of special games with different numbers of unit games to be executed.
It is characterized in that the average number of unit games executed in a plurality of types of first special games is the same as the average number of unit games executed in a plurality of types of second special games. This is a Pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example executes the promotion production in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state while executing the promotion effect in the game length open big jackpot, while in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the second main In the game manager open big hit, promotion effect is not executed. Further, the promotion effect may not be executed in the first main game length open big hit in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (26),
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect indicating the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22),
In the normal gaming state and the low-probability lottery state, the result of the win/no win determination by the first win/no win determination means is a win, and the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group. When the special game is executed by being performed, while the specific effect is executed during the execution of the special game,
When the game is in the specific game state and in the high-probability lottery state, the result of the win/no win determination by the second win/no win determination means is a win, and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed as the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group. When the special game is executed by being performed, the pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured not to execute the specific effect during execution of the special game.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the holding-interior long-distance production in which there is a big hit within the hold during the big hit execution is performed during the distribution game execution round or after the distribution game execution round (specific area C22. The condition based on the configuration is as follows.
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (27),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning port can enter,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port,
When the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means for controlling the holding to occur,
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, control is performed so that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit and then the identification information is stopped according to the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold. Identification information display control means,
Equipped with
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect that is an effect that suggests the possibility of executing a special game related to a certain hold.
When the hold-ahead read effect is executed during the special game, the hold-ahead read effect is executed at the timing after the player enters the specific area.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is a V target production (to the specific area C22) in the first main game length open big hit (big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round of the first main game side). Of the game ball is fired = right hitting) and a second main game length open big hit (big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round of the first main game side). May be configured to have different effect contents (the V aiming effect in the second main game length open big hit does not occur in the V aiming effect in the first main game length open big hit), and as a concept based on the structure Is
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (28),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning port can enter,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
At the time of execution of the special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect, which is the effect display content related to the ease of entering the specific area,
Of the special games to be executed when the result of the first win/fail judgment is a win, the first easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning/absence determination is a win, the second easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
The effect mode of the specific effect executed during the execution of the first easy-to-enter special game and the effect mode of the specific effect executed during the execution of the second-easy-to-enter special game are configured to be different. It is a pachinko machine characterized by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has one or more ending effects {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive holidays during a specific game, the total number of coins acquired during the consecutive holidays, a plurality of types of specific effects occur, etc.). When the effect during special game or specific game is displayed, which is displayed only when the condition (combined with) is satisfied}, in other cases, an effect that prompts right-handedness (for example, “Aim V”) is displayed. (Production) may be configured to have a different presentation mode (display is less noticeable than in other cases), and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (29),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning port can enter,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means,
If the result of the winning/non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display unit, special game control means for executing a special game in which the variable winning a prize port can be in an advantageous state for the player,
Equipped with
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
As a state related to the game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state with a higher profit than the normal game state,
Starting from the special game A, the special game continuous number, which is the number of special games executed up to the special game B that is in the normal game state after the end of the special game, can be measured,
At the time of execution of the special game, it is configured to be able to execute a specific effect, which is the effect display content related to the ease of entering the specific area,
The production mode of the specific effect during execution of the special game B in which the special game continuous number is a predetermined number or more, and the production mode of the specific effect during execution of the special game B in which the special game continuous number is less than the predetermined number. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example does not notify the current round number for at least a part of the first main game length open jackpot, while it notifies the current round number for the second main game length open jackpot. However, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (30),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning port can enter,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determining means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display part. Prepare,
If the result of the first winning/non-winning judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit, a first special game that can make the variable winning a prize state advantageous for the player is executed. Is configured as
When the result of the second winning/non-winning judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the second identification information display unit, a second special game that can make the variable winning a prize state advantageous for the player is executed. Is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
Of the special games to be executed when the result of the first win/fail judgment is a win, the first easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning/absence determination is a win, the second easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
While the first easy entry special game is being executed, there is a unit game that does not notify the number of unit games being executed, while the second easy entry special game is being executed, the number of unit games being executed is notified. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured so that there is no unit game that does not exist.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to be a gaming machine that is a first-class first-class multifunction machine and is capable of executing parallel lottery, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (31),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
With a variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determining means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display part. Prepare,
Even if the first main game identification information is being variably displayed, it is possible to start variably displaying the second main game identification information. Even if the second main game identification information is variably displayed, the first main game identification information This is a pachinko game machine characterized by being capable of starting variable display.

The pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured such that the special figure 2 small hit ratio is higher than the special figure 1 small hit ratio (whether the special hit 1 is equipped with a small hit or not) As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (32),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance and can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to an open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance or compared to a closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is difficult to enter when the game ball is unable to enter the predetermined entrance when it is displaced to the closed state or in the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the first main game identification information. One main game identification information display control means,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two main game identification information display control means,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, it is variable until there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning a prize port or a predetermined period has elapsed. It is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game that allows the winning opening to be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times, and the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group. After being displayed, a variable winning a prize opening opening game that executes a unit game that can make the variable winning a prize state advantageous for the player until there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize or a specific period elapses. Special game control means that can be executed,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Alternatively, the first main game identification information cannot be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group. It is a pachinko machine characterized by that.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the variation time of the second main gaming symbol in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state is relatively short, and as a concept based on the configuration, ,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (33),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the low probability lottery state is the variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the high probability lottery state. Is configured to be a relatively long time,
The variable display period of the second main game identification information in the specific game state and the high probability lottery state is the variable display period of the second main game identification information in the normal game state and the high probability lottery state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be relatively longer than that.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example has at least a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state, a non-probability variation game state and a time reduction game state, and a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state. It may be configured to have, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (34),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
As a combination of game states, a normal game state and a low probability lottery state, a high probability lottery state and a normal game state, and a specific game state and a high probability lottery state are configured to be present at least at least. It is a machine.

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state are most advantageous in the prize ball acquisition expected value or base per unit time when the game ball is continuously fired (except during the big hit). May be configured as, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (35),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The expected value of the number of prize balls when the game balls are continuously fired in the situation where the special game is not being executed is in the high-probability lottery state and in the normal game state, it is the high-probability lottery state and the normal game state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be relatively higher than when not.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the variation time of the second main game symbol in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state is relatively long, and a concept based on the configuration. as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (36),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state is relatively relative to the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not the high probability lottery state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured for a short time.

Pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, caused by the game state is different, the difference in the variation time of the first main gaming symbol and the variation time of the second main gaming symbol, the variation time of the second main gaming symbol May be configured so that the difference between the two is larger, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (37),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
An average value of the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and an average value of the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state, An average value of the variable display period of the second identification information in the specific game state and the low probability lottery state, and an average value of the variable display period of the second identification information in the specific game state and the high probability lottery state, Comparing, the difference between the average value that is the longest time and the average value that is the shortest time is the second variation display period difference value (second main game symbol, non-stochastic variation game state and non-time shortening game state Average value of fluctuation time and probability fluctuation in gaming state and time shortening Average value of fluctuation time in gaming state, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening Average value of fluctuation time in gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening The difference between the average value of the longest time and the average value of the shortest time by comparing the average value of the fluctuation time in the gaming state),
An average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and an average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state, An average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the specific gaming state and the low probability lottery state, and an average value of the variation display period of the first identification information in the specific gaming state and the high probability lottery state, Comparing, the difference between the average value that is the longest time and the average value that is the shortest time is the first fluctuation display period difference value (the first main game symbol, non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state Average value of fluctuation time and probability fluctuation in gaming state and time shortening Average value of fluctuation time in gaming state, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening Average value of fluctuation time in gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening The difference between the average value of the longest time and the average value of the shortest time by comparing the average value of the fluctuation time in the gaming state),
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second variable display period difference value is configured to be larger than the first variable display period difference value.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the time-reduced game state can be ended by winning the small hit (the time-reduced game state can be shifted to the non-time-reduced game state). Based on the concept,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (38),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, it is compared to when it is displaced to the closed state. Then, the game ball can be easily or can enter the predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is predetermined compared to when it is displaced to the open state. A ball inlet (for example, a variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured such that the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the second main game starting port B10,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information is provided,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) or the identification. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening opening game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until the period has elapsed, by executing a unit game once. With special game control means,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group in the specific game state, when satisfying the specific condition, the game state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game becomes the normal game state. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example can end the time-reduced game state only in a specific game state even if the same small hit symbol is won (for example, in the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state. While the time reduction game state can be ended by the small hit, the time reduction game state is not ended by the small hit in the non-probability variation game state and the time shortened game state), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (39),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, it is compared to when it is displaced to the closed state. Then, the game ball can be easily or can enter the predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is predetermined compared to when it is displaced to the open state. A ball inlet (for example, a variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured such that the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the second main game starting port B10,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information is provided,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) or the identification. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening opening game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until the period has elapsed, by executing a unit game once. With special game control means,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific game state in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game becomes the normal game state. Is configured,
When the variable winning opening opening game is started in the specific game state and the high probability lottery state, it is possible to be in the normal gaming state and the high probability lottery state after the execution of the variable winning hole opening game is finished. Has been done,
When the variable winning opening opening game is started in the specific game state and the low probability lottery state, it is configured not to be in the normal gaming state and the low probability lottery state after the execution of the variable winning hole opening game is finished. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that whether or not the time-reduced gaming state ends depending on the small hit symbol to be won, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (40),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, it is compared to when it is displaced to the closed state. Then, the game ball can be easily or can enter the predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10), and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is predetermined compared to when it is displaced to the open state. A ball inlet (for example, a variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) configured such that the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter the second main game starting port B10,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information is provided,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20) or the identification. It is possible to execute a variable winning opening opening game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until the period has elapsed, by executing a unit game once. With special game control means,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state. ,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific game state in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game becomes the normal game state. Is configured,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A of the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the specific condition can be satisfied,
In the pachinko game machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode B of the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the specific condition is not satisfied. is there.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example can end the time reduction game state when the first main game side small hit symbol is won, while the time when the second main game side small hit symbol is won. The shortened gaming state may be configured not to end, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (41),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute only one unit game in which a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning a prize or the variable winning a prize is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined time passes. ,
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
As a variable winning a prize opening game, the first variable winning a prize opening game that is executed when the result of the determination of the first identification information is successful, and the result of the determination of the second identification information is successful Has a second variable winning opening game to be executed in
If the first variable winning opening opening game is started in the specific game state, it is configured so that it can be in the normal gaming state after the execution of the first variable winning opening opening game.
When the second variable winning opening opening game is started in the specific game state, it is configured not to be in the normal gaming state after the execution of the second variable winning opening opening game is finished. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit, a big hit is started after the end of the small hit, and a concept based on the structure. as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (42),
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
If the result of the win/no determination is a win, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
If a special area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, a special game is executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game. It is a pachinko machine.

In the pachinko game machine according to the present example, the distribution special winning opening having the specific area C22 is opened at the 1R of the big hit. The number of special winning openings may be one or two. In the case of two special winning openings, one of the two special winning openings may be configured not to have the specific region C22, As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (43),
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A first variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A second variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the second variable winning opening can enter,
If the result of the win/fail judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display portion, a special game that can make the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening advantageous for the player is executed. With special game control means to
During the execution of the special game, the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the first variable winning opening or the second variable winning opening or a predetermined time elapses. It is configured to execute a unit game that is in a state multiple times,
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the second variable winning opening is configured to be opened when the first unit game in the special game is executed.

The pachinko game machine according to this example has the following board structure.
Near the center of the board: Near the first main game start opening: Right from the top of the board: (1) Auxiliary game starting opening, (2) First main playing opening provided with an electric accessory, (3) Second main playing start Mouth, (4) Special winning mouth (with specific area C22)
(May be provided with a big winning opening to open during the small hit), the concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (44),
A first main game start opening where game balls can enter,
A second main game starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A third main game start opening where game balls can enter,
Auxiliary game start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the third main game starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the third main game starting port or is compared with the closed state. Then, it is easy to enter the ball, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the third main game starting port as compared to the inoperable state or the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning port can enter,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit that supports the main game,
The main game department is
A first main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a first main game random number based on a ball entering the first main game starting port or the third main game starting port,
A first main game win/shut determination means for performing a first win/win decision based on the first main game random number;
A first main game identification information display content determining means for determining stop identification information of the first main game identification information based on the result of the first hit determination.
Based on the determination by the first main game identification information display content determination means, the first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information, and then controls to stop display the stop identification information. A game identification information display control means,
Second main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a second main game random number based on the ball entering the second main game start opening,
A second main game win/loss determination means for performing a second win/failure determination based on the second main game random number;
A second main game identification information display content determining means for determining the second main game stop identification information of the second main game identification information based on the result of the second winning/disallowing determination,
Based on the determination by the second main game identification information display content deciding means, the second main game identification information display section variably displays the second main game identification information and then controls the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed. A game identification information display control means,
If the result of the first winning/disabling judgment or the second winning/disallowing judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first main game identification information display section or the second main game first identification information display section, the variable And a special game control means for executing a special game that can bring the winning opening to an advantageous state for the player,
Auxiliary game department,
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening,
Auxiliary game identification information display content determination means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and determining a stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information,
Based on the determination by the auxiliary game identification information display content determination means, after the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display section, the auxiliary game identification information display section stops and displays the stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information. An auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to
If the result of the determination of success or failure based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the stop display mode of the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is moved within the displacement drive period during which the variable member can be displaced. After displacing from the closed state to the open state, an easy-entering-ball game determination executing means for executing an easy-entering ball game in which the operation of displacing the closed state is performed one or more times,
As a downflow route through which the game balls flow down in the game area, there is a first downflow route and a second downflow route different from the first downflow route,
When the game ball flows down the first flow route, it is configured to flow near the first start opening,
When the game ball flows down the second downflow route, it is configured to flow down in the vicinity of the auxiliary game starting opening, the second starting opening, the third starting opening, and the variable winning opening. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko game machine according to this example has the following specifications.
(1) It is a ball machine.
(2) The second main game side has a higher percentage of long open big hits than the first main game side.
(3) When a player enters a V winning hole with a long open big hit won in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the time reduction game state is entered after the big hit ends (or the time reduction game state is reached) Is relatively high)
(4) If you win the long open big hit in the probability variation game state and enter the V winning opening during the big hit, do not shift to the time shortening game state after the big hit (or shift to the time shortening game state) hard)
(5) If the small hit on the first main game side is won in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state are transferred after the completion of the small hit.
May be configured as follows, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (45),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determining means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display part. Prepare,
When the result of the first win/win determination or the second win/fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. It is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can be in an advantageous state,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
Of the special games to be executed when the result of the first win/fail judgment is a win, the first easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
Of the special games that are executed when the result of the second winning/absence determination is a win, the second easy-to-enter special game is a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area during execution of the special game. Have,
A special game executed when the result of the second win/loss determination is a win, rather than a rate at which the special game executed when the result of the first win/win determination is a win Is configured so that the ratio of the second special game easy to enter is higher.
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
When entering a specific area during execution of a special game, it is configured to be in a high probability lottery state after the end of the special game,
In the normal game state and the low-probability lottery state, if the first easy entry special game or the second easy entry special game is won and the special area is entered during execution of the special game, the special It is configured to be in a specific game state after the game ends,
In the specific game state and in the high-probability lottery state, if the player wins the first easy-to-enter special game or the second easy-to-enter special game and enters a specific area during the execution of the special game, the special It is configured not to be in a specific game state after the game ends,
When the result of the first winning/absence determination is a win and the variable winning a prize opening game is executed, it is configured to be in a normal gaming state and a high probability lottery state after the end of the variable winning a prize opening game. It is a pachinko machine characterized by that.

The pachinko game machine according to this example is a state (probability variation game) in which "the expected value of the number of game balls obtained by a small hit before a big hit is less than or equal to a base of 1 or more (the number of game balls acquired is equal to or more than the number of game balls launched)". State and non-time-reduced game state) is the maximum winning ball due to a big hit. For example, if the small hit probability is 98/100 and the large hit probability is 2/100, the small hit is won on average 49 times before the big hit. Therefore, the expected value of the number of gaming balls obtained for 49 small hits may be configured so as not to exceed the maximum payout in one big hit in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (46),
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display unit, the identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed,
If the result of the winning/non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous for the player is executed. Is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
In the normal game state and the high probability lottery state, the expected value of the number of prize balls is the highest among the special games that can be won. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that the expected value of the total number of prize balls by the variable winning opening opening game that can be won before the special game is won is smaller.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to maintain (maintain ON) the main game probability variation flag during a small hit, but not maintain it during a big hit, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (47),
Equipped with a starting port where game balls can enter,
If the result of the win/no determination is a win, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
When a special game is executed in a high probability lottery state, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state during execution of the special game,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed in a high probability lottery state, it is configured to be in a high probability drawing state while the variable winning opening opening game is being executed. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to maintain (maintain ON) the main game short-time flag during a small hit, but not maintain it during a big hit, and as a concept based on the configuration,
The pachinko machine related to this concept (48) is
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the starting port and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the starting port or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, When the game ball is displaced into the starting state when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
If the result of the win/no determination is a win, it is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
When the special game is executed in the situation of the specific game state, it is configured to be in the normal game state during the execution of the special game,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed in a specific game state, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in the specific gaming state while the variable winning opening opening game is being executed. Is.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the "big hit signal", which is an external terminal signal output during the small hit, is output during the small hit start demo time depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit and/ Alternatively, the period output during the small hitting end demonstration time may be different (for example, if the small hit is won in the time-saving game state, it is relatively short). Based on the concept,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (49),
Equipped with a starting port where game balls can enter,
If the result of the winning/disapproval determination is a win, it is configured to execute a variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening can be in an advantageous state for the player,
As the gaming state, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is a gaming state with a higher profit than the normal gaming state,
It is configured to be able to output external output information (for example, an external terminal signal related to a small hit in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment) to be output from the pachinko gaming machine to the outside,
The external output information is configured to be output upon execution of the variable winning opening opening game,
The output period of the external output information that is output when the variable winning opening opening game is executed in the situation of the normal gaming state, and that the variable winning opening opening game is executed in the situation of the specific gaming state The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the output period of the external output information that is output upon the occasion of the above is configured to be different from the output period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the variation fixed time of the small hit symbol and the variation fixed time of the symbols other than the small hit symbol (for example, a lost symbol) are different, and the concept based on the configuration. as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (50),
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display unit, the identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed,
It is configured such that the identification information is not variably displayed from the time when the certain stop identification information is stopped and displayed until the variation fixed time elapses.
If the result of the winning/disapproval determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a variable winning opening opening game that can bring the variable winning opening into an advantageous state for the player is executed. And
The variable fixed time related to the stop identification information that triggers the variable winning opening opening game (for example, the variable fixed time related to the small hit symbol) and the stop identification information that does not trigger the variable winning opening opening game. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the time value is different from the variable fixed time (for example, the variable fixed time related to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the fixed fixed time of the small hit symbol is different depending on whether the small hit symbol on the first main game side or the small hit symbol on the second main game side. The concept based on
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (51),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determining means, second identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display part. Prepare,
When the result of the first win/win determination or the second win/fail determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. It is configured to execute a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can be in an advantageous state,
It is configured such that the first identification information and the second identification information are not variably displayed until a fixed fixed time elapses after a certain stop identification information is statically displayed.
When the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display portion, the variable winning opening can be opened to an advantageous state for the player. Is configured to perform a game,
The variable fixed time related to the stop identification information when the stop identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is the first identification information (for example, the fixed fixed time related to the small hit symbol on the first main game side) ), and a variable fixed time related to the stop identification information when the stop identification information that triggers the variable winning opening opening game is the second identification information (for example, to the small hit symbol on the second main game side) Fluctuating fixed time) is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the time value is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the variable fixed time of the small hit symbol may differ depending on the gaming state, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (52),
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display unit, the identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed,
It is configured such that the identification information is not variably displayed from the time when the certain stop identification information is stopped and displayed until the variation fixed time elapses.
If the result of the winning/disapproval determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a variable winning opening opening game that can bring the variable winning opening into an advantageous state for the player is executed. And
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
The fixed fixed time related to the stop identification information that triggers the variable winning opening opening game in the low probability lottery state, and the stop identification information that triggers the variable winning opening opening game in the high probability lottery state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the time value is different from the variable fixed time.

The pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured to be able to output an external terminal signal corresponding to a variable fixed time, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (53)
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display unit, the identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed,
It is configured such that the identification information is not variably displayed from the time when the certain stop identification information is stopped and displayed until the variation fixed time elapses.
When the result of the winning/non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display unit, the variable winning opening is configured to execute a variable winning opening opening game that can be in an advantageous state for the player. It is configured to be able to output external output information (for example, an external terminal signal related to a small hit) for output from the pachinko game machine to the outside,
The external output information is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be output upon execution of a variable winning opening opening game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured as follows in which the player in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state urges the player not to perform right-handing To configure.
(1) The display of the decorative design on the second main game side is not executed.
(2) The opening time of the special winning opening in the small hit and big hit on the second main game side is set to be short (the opening in the small hit is short opening, and at the same time as the opening of the big winning opening, the launch of the game ball is started. In the case of a big hit, the game ball does not reach the special winning opening at the timing when it can enter the specific area C22. It makes meaningless to aim at "big hit ⇒ probability fluctuation game state".)
(3) Non-probability variation game state and time shortening The variation time of the second main game symbol in a game state other than the game state has 60 patterns between 0 minutes and less than 10 minutes (almost equal distribution) (right) If you continue to hit, keep the base low compared to left-handedness, and detect the fluctuation of the second main game symbol in advance to eliminate the aim of raising the base by entering the special winning opening).
(4) A delay route that delays the flow of the game ball is provided on the right side of the board (the route that passes when right-handing is executed).
May be configured as follows, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (54),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
With a third starting port where game balls can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the third starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the third starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured so that the game ball cannot enter the third starting port or is more difficult to enter than the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening or the third starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the information about the first identification information or the second identification information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub game identification information in the effect display section,
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
When the information about the first identification information is received, the secondary game identification information based on the first identification information is displayed on the effect display device, while when the information about the second identification information is received, the second identification information is displayed. It is configured not to display the sub game identification information based on the effect display device,
When the result of the first winning/disabling judgment is successful, the period during which the variable winning a prize opening in the special game and the variable winning a prize opening game executed when the result of the second winning/disabling judgment is successful is It is configured to be relatively shorter than the period in which the variable winning opening in the special game and the variable winning opening opening game executed in
When a game ball is launched after the result of the second winning/absence determination is successful and the variable winning opening opening game is started, the launched gaming ball is configured to be unable to enter the variable winning port. ,
The variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not in the high-probability lottery state is relatively relative to the variation display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and the high-probability lottery state. It is configured to last for a long time,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to have a plurality of types of selection candidates for the variable display period of the second identification information in the normal gaming state and not in the high probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured as one of the following as a measure against the fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol.
(1) If the first main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit in the variation of the big hit or the small hit of the second main game symbol, the second main game symbol is stopped at the same time as the stop of the first main game symbol. Display the lost design (forced stop).
Or
(2) If the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit in the variation of the big hit or the small hit of the first main game symbol, if the second main game symbol is stopped, the first main game symbol is stopped at the same time. Suspend fluctuations.
May be configured as follows, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (55),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
With a variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit determination means for performing a first hit determination based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, first identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determination means, after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit, a first identification information display control means for controlling to stop display stop identification information,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit/miss determination means for performing a second hit/miss determination based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, after the second identification information display unit variably displayed the second identification information, the second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the stop identification information,
If the result of the first win/no win determination or the second win/no win determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed in the first identification information display unit or the second identification information display unit, the variable winning port is set for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be in an advantageous state,
Equipped with
The variable display start condition of the second identification information can be satisfied even when the first identification information is in variable display, and the variable display start condition of the first identification information can be satisfied even when the second identification information is in variable display. Is configured to be possible,
If the stop identification information of the first identification information for which the result of the first win/fail judgment is a win is displayed while the second identification information for which the result of the second win/fail judgment is a win is displayed variably, The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the stop identification information of the identification information is changed to the stop identification information of the second identification information for which the result of the second win/fail judgment is non-winning, and is stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the auxiliary game winning probability is not 0 even in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state, or in the probability variation gaming state and time shortened gaming state.
When the big hit in the non-probability variation game state and non-time shortening game state, the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the big hit starts, and after the big hit starts, the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation stops and the auxiliary game wins The accessory release time is a relatively short release time.
When the big hit in the non-probability variation game state and non-time shortening game state, the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the small hit starts, and the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation stop and the auxiliary game win after the small hit start The electric accessory release time is a relatively short release time.
When the big hit in the probability change game state and the time shortening game state, the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the big hit starts, and if the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation stop after the big hit start and the auxiliary game is elected, the electric accessory The opening time is a relatively short opening time.
When the big hit in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, when the auxiliary game symbol is changing before the small hit starts, and when the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation stop and the auxiliary game win after the small hit start, the electric The accessory opening time may be configured to be a relatively long opening time, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (56),
A main game starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a predetermined ball inlet (for example, A game ball can enter the second main game starting opening B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10). A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball as compared to the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning port can enter the ball,
A main game identification information display section capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10),
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to variably display the main game identification information and then stop the display. Main game identification information display control means,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20)? Alternatively, it is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game in which the variable winning a prize hole (for example, the first special winning a prize hole C10, the second special winning a prize hole C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times until a predetermined period has elapsed. After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10 and the second special winning a prize mouth C20). Or, a variable winning a prize opening game that executes once a unit game in which the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first award winning mouth C10, the second award winning mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player until a specific period elapses. With special game control means that can be executed,
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
A determination is made based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and after the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g), the stop display is displayed. An auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to
If the result of the determination on the basis of the auxiliary game random number is “win”, it is a period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. Within the displacement driving period, the operation of displacing the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state is performed once or plural times. Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game determination executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main gaming starting port electric auditorium item B11d) more than the normal gaming state. ) Has a specific game state that is easy to open,
In the situation where the auxiliary game identification information based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the normal game state. When the special game is executed by doing so, and the auxiliary game identification information that has been displayed in a variable manner during the execution of the special game is stopped and displayed, a variable member (for example, in the easy entry game based on the stop display) The period during which the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is in the open state is configured to be relatively short,
In the situation where the auxiliary game identification information based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the normal game state. By doing so, the variable winning opening opening game is executed, and when the auxiliary game identification information that has been variably displayed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is stopped and displayed, the easy winning game based on the stop display is displayed. The variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is configured to be relatively short in the open state,
In the situation where the auxiliary game identification information based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in the specific game state. When a special game is executed by doing so, and when the auxiliary game identification information that has been variably displayed during the execution of the special game is stopped and displayed, a variable member (for example, in the easy entry game based on the stop display) The period during which the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is in the open state is configured to be relatively short,
In the situation where the auxiliary game identification information based on the auxiliary game random number is won and the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed, the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group when in the specific game state. By doing so, the variable winning opening opening game is executed, and when the auxiliary game identification information that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the easy winning game based on the stopped display is displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is configured to be relatively long during the open state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is small in the final variation of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (for example, the 100th rotation after the transition to the time reduction game state). If you win,
(1) It shifts to a non-stochastic variation game state when the winning symbol stops.
Or
(2) After the small hit game, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state are entered.
May be configured as any of the above, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (57),
A main game starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a predetermined ball inlet (for example, A game ball can enter the second main game starting opening B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10). A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball as compared to the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning port can enter the ball,
A main game identification information display section capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10),
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to variably display the main game identification information and then stop the display. Main game identification information display control means,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20)? Alternatively, it is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game in which the variable winning a prize hole (for example, the first special winning a prize hole C10, the second special winning a prize hole C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times until a predetermined period has elapsed. After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10 and the second special winning a prize mouth C20). Or, a variable winning a prize opening game that executes once a unit game in which the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first award winning mouth C10, the second award winning mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player until a specific period elapses. With special game control means that can be executed,
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
A determination is made based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and after the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g), the stop display is displayed. An auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to
If the result of the determination on the basis of the auxiliary game random number is “win”, it is a period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. Within the displacement driving period, the operation of displacing the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state is performed once or plural times. Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game determination executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main gaming starting port electric auditorium item B11d) more than the normal gaming state. ) Has a specific game state that is easy to open,
When entering a specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the special game is configured to be executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game,
The unit from the start of variable display of the main game identification information to the stop display is set as a unit, and when the number of repeats of the unit reaches a predetermined number in the specific game state, it is controllable to be in the normal game state. And
After the execution of the special game, the special game state is entered, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information before the final time of the particular game state, so that the variable winning opening is opened. When the game is executed, it is configured to maintain a specific game state during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game,
After the execution of the special game, it becomes a specific game state, and the variable winning opening opening game is realized by stopping and displaying the stop display mode belonging to a specific group as the stop display mode of the main game identification information which is the final time of the specific game state. When executed, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be in a normal game state while the variable winning opening opening game is being executed.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (55),
A main game starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball inlet (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to an open state, a predetermined ball inlet (for example, A game ball can enter the second main game starting opening B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game starting opening B10). A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball as compared to the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable winning opening (for example, a first big winning opening C10, a second big winning opening C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning port can enter the ball,
A main game identification information display section capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M),
Main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on a ball entering a main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10),
Based on the main game random number acquired by the main game random number acquisition means, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is controlled to variably display the main game identification information and then stop the display. Main game identification information display control means,
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20)? Alternatively, it is possible to execute a special game in which a unit game in which the variable winning a prize hole (for example, the first special winning a prize hole C10, the second special winning a prize hole C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times until a predetermined period has elapsed. After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, there is a specific number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10 and the second special winning a prize mouth C20). Or, a variable winning a prize opening game that executes once a unit game in which the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first award winning mouth C10, the second award winning mouth C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player until a specific period elapses. With special game control means that can be executed,
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by a game ball entering the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
A determination is made based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and after the auxiliary game identification information is variably displayed on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g), the stop display is displayed. An auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to
If the result of the determination on the basis of the auxiliary game random number is “win”, it is a period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed. Within the displacement driving period, the operation of displacing the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state is performed once or plural times. Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game determination executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game,
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal gaming state and a variable member (for example, the second main gaming starting port electric auditorium item B11d) more than the normal gaming state. ) Has a specific game state that is easy to open,
When entering a specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the special game is configured to be executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game,
The unit from the start of variable display of the main game identification information to the stop display is set as a unit, and when the number of repeats of the unit reaches a predetermined number in the specific game state, it is controllable to be in the normal game state. And
After the execution of the special game, the special game state is entered, and the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the main game identification information before the final time of the particular game state, so that the variable winning opening is opened. When the game is executed, it is configured to maintain a specific game state during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game,
After the execution of the special game, it becomes a specific game state, and the variable winning opening opening game is realized by stopping and displaying the stop display mode belonging to a specific group as the stop display mode of the main game identification information which is the final time of the specific game state. If it is executed, it is in a specific game state while the variable winning opening opening game is being executed, and is configured to be in a normal game state when the execution of the variable winning opening opening game is completed. It may be a pachinko game machine characterized by.

The following specifications are applied to the pachinko game machine according to this example.
(1) V for each type 1 small hit.
(2) There is one or more special figure 2 reservations (0 in the modified example).
(3) Digestion in order of entry (Modified example is preferential digestion of Toku-zu 1).
(4) The number of time saving is different depending on the big hit symbol (time saving end condition is different).
(5) When the jackpot symbol A is in the low-low state, the special figure 2 fluctuation is 10 times, or the special figure 2 fluctuation + special figure 1 fluctuation is 30 times, and the time saving is completed.
(6) When the big hit symbol B is in the low state, the special time 2 fluctuation + the special time 1 fluctuation is 100 times, and the time saving ends.
(7) When the jackpot pattern A is in the low-high state, the special time 2 fluctuation + the special time 1 fluctuation is 100 times, and the time saving ends.
(8) The fluctuation of the special figure 1 big hit in the low and high state (which shifts after the first hit) is relatively longer than the fluctuation of the special figure 2 small hit.
It may be configured as follows, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (58),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to the second starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or enter in comparison with the closed state. It is easy, and when the game ball is displaced into the second starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
With a specific area where the game ball that entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a first main game random number based on a ball entering the first main game starting opening,
A first main game win/shut determination means for performing a first win/win decision based on the first main game random number;
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first suspension is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification is displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the first hit/fail judgment result based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the first identification information after variably displaying the information,
A second main game win/loss determination means for performing a second win/failure determination based on the second main game random number;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information is displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the second judgment result based on the second random number related to the second hold. Second identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the second identification information after variably displaying the information,
If the result of the first winning/disabling judgment or the second winning/disallowing judgment is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the first main game identification information display section or the second main game first identification information display section, the variable And a special game control means for executing a special game or a variable prize opening opening game in which the prize hole can be in an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
Of the first hold and the second hold, it is configured to satisfy the variable display start condition in order from the first identification information or the second identification information related to the first hold or the second hold that occurs earlier.
When entering a specific area during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, the special game is configured to be executed after the end of the variable winning opening opening game,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal game state,
From the variable display start to the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information as one unit, the total number of times of repeating the one unit of the first identification information and the second identification information in the specific game state is After reaching the predetermined number of times A or the predetermined number of times B, it is configured to be controllable to be in a normal game state,
The predetermined number A is configured to be larger than the predetermined number B,
From the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, one unit is set, and when it is in the specific game state, after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches the specific number, it is configured to be controllable to be in the normal game state And
As a special game, at least a first special game and a second special game that is a special game different from the first special game,
When the first special game is executed in the normal game state and becomes the specific game state after the end of the first special game, between the first identification information and the second identification information after the end of the first special game When the total number of times of repeating one unit reaches a predetermined number B, or when the number of times of repeating one unit of the second identification information reaches a specific number, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
When the second special game is executed in the normal game state and becomes the specific game state after the end of the second special game, between the first identification information and the second identification information after the end of the second special game. When the total number of repetitions of the one unit reaches a predetermined number A, the normal game state is set,
When the first special game is executed in the specific game state and the specific game state is entered after the end of the first special game, the first identification information and the second identification information are set after the end of the first special game. A pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to enter a normal game state when the total number of times of repeating one unit reaches a predetermined number of times A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a combination of a decorative pattern showing a big hit and a decorative pattern showing a small hit, the former is a combination pattern of the same decorative patterns even if the game state is different, but the latter is It may be configured to be a combination pattern of different decorative patterns, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (59),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part based on the determination by the identification information display content determining means,
If the result of the winning/non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous for the player is executed. With special game control means,
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the information about the identification information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of displaying the sub game identification information in the effect display section,
As the gaming state, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is a gaming state with a higher profit than the normal gaming state,
When the information related to the identification information is received, the sub-game identification information based on the identification information is configured to be displayed on the effect display device,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
Display mode of sub game identification information based on identification information that triggers execution of special game displayed in normal gaming state, and identification information that triggers execution of special game displayed in specific gaming state It is configured to have the same display mode as the display mode of the sub game identification information based on
The display mode of the sub game identification information based on the identification information that triggers the execution of the variable winning opening opening game displayed in the normal gaming state, and the variable winning opening opening game displayed in the specific gaming state are executed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode is different from the display mode of the secondary game identification information based on the identification information that triggers.

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, among the notice effects executed before the reach effect execution in the reach fluctuation, there are more types of notice effects denying the small hit than the types of notice effects denying the big hit. It may be configured, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (60),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A production display unit that can display productions,
It is provided with a sub-game section that controls the effect display on the effect display section,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win/fail judgment means for performing a win/fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining the stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is displayed variably in the identification information display unit, the identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed,
If the result of the winning/non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit, a special game or a variable winning opening opening game that can make the variable winning opening advantageous for the player is executed. Is configured as
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute a plurality of unit games in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes,
During the execution of the variable winning opening opening game, it is configured to execute only once the unit game in which the variable winning opening is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening or a predetermined time passes. Has been done,
The sub-game department is
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
It is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of notice effects (eg, notice effects shown in FIG. 107) that are effects that suggest the possibility of executing a special game or a variable winning opening opening game related to identification information that is being displayed in a variable manner as effect display contents. And
Characterized by the fact that the number of types of notice productions in which it is definite that the variable winning opening opening game is not executed is greater than the number of types of notice productions in which it is decided that the special game is not executed It is a pachinko machine.

Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko game machines are mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably housing the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably/closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and withdrawing the game balls to the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper bowl D20 and the lower bowl D22, and a sound effect according to a game state or the like is output.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a wind turbine (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. Generates mouth entrance information.

Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting mouth B10 includes a second main game starting mouth ball entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting mouth electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball. Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win the second main game starting port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are provided separately, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). While the ball is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, while being easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. .. It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged separately, but not limited to this, the first main game starting opening A10 and the first main game starting opening A10. The two main game starting openings B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper part of the second main game starting opening B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game starting opening A10. You may.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is equipped with an auxiliary game starting port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information that indicates the entrance of the game ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. {However, it is not limited to this, while the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game ball flowing down (standard) may be configured so as not to be guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10}.

Next, above the outlet D36, a first big winning opening C10 and a second big winning opening C20 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the right or left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). Is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol and is in an open state, and has a horizontal rectangular shape, and is an outlet. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above D36. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 is a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special winning opening electric prize C11d (and a first big winning). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates the entry when entering. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game balls cannot be won in the first special winning opening C10 or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game balls are easy to win (the first winning hole C10). (1) The special winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a bello-type attacker) or a mode (so-called slide-type attacker) in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll is used as a special winning opening, and the opening and the closing of the opening can be adopted. This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and the second special winning Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, in the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d, the second special winning opening C20 is set in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a bello-type attacker) or a mode (so-called slide-type attacker) in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll is used as a special winning opening, and the opening and the closing of the opening can be adopted. It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol hold display section A21h (second main game symbol hold display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers and "-" that is missing (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: fast blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), a later-described effect A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG is a device for displaying an effect image including a decorative pattern that fluctuates/stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol/second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect is executed including variable display of decorative symbols and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols that mimics a game of a slot machine, for example, a first holding display unit SG12 (and a second holding display unit SG13) that displays main game holding information. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp is equivalent to the number of reserve of auxiliary game symbol variation (the number of auxiliary game symbol variation not executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path for a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. The game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30 and plays a role by blinking or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. Main control board M for performing control directly related to the profit of the person), and production control means (sub-main control unit) for performing display control for various productions on the production display device SG that adds interest to the game content. SM, a sub-sub-control unit SS that mainly performs an effect display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with a prize in each prize hole. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out to, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) of an upper ball plate D20. A launch device D42 that launches one ball at a time to the area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of the launch device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. The power switch Ea, which is a switch to be turned off, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as change/stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls lighting of the game effect lamp D26, execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation/stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display/stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, and hold display and notice display. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, etc.) handled by is mounted. The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board and device will be described below.

First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s, second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning detecting device (not shown, general winning opening is a winning opening that does not carry out the symbol lottery, although there is a winning ball ], a drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-described first special winning opening electric prize solenoid C13, second special winning entrance electric prize solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input/output device that is essential to, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM/sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production/game progress state, etc. can be transmitted to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M is connected by wiring to the hall computer HC via the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game-related information from an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and accepts a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmitting. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (the launch handle, the launch motor, the ball feed device) are provided. Etc.) is also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided separately and adjacent to the game machine. However, it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern or the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects as described above. .. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( The lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and the determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the sub-sub controller SS performs the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device. Is configured. In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is an advantage in that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by configuring it as an integrated unit). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, by executing the voice control by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when the VDP is integrated with the voice control circuit). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first/second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) relating to the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and are communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub-control section SS (production display means SS) for performing image production, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), a speaker D24, etc. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub-sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of a ROM, a RAM, an element such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing and the like. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (device) will be described.

The “random number” in the claims and the specification is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “0” to “0” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "255". Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the method of expressing each value in the random number is a method of sequentially expressing the value along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears. ) Is defined by a value having a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like.

Further, the limited frequency, the type and/or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and/or the selection rate.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a first/second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game starting opening electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the driving (opening) time of the electric winning accessory B11d at the second main gaming starting opening B10. doing. In addition, the pachinko game machine which relates to this execution form has the winning a prize sphere counter MP33c which measures the winning a prize to the 1st large winning a prize mouth C10 and the 2nd large winning a prize mouth C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number and a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the probability of being drawn to a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time shortening game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time shortening. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of hours saved is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if it has a function of performing a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability varying game or a time-reducing game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time there is a change in the symbol Good (so-called, in the case of Pachinko game machines with a falling lottery function).

Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 that can display the stop and change of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first/second main game common peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (big hit). And has the second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has a possible auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

Here, the packaging variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state since the end of the special game in order to switch the effect stage. Further, the number-of-games counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times the jackpot is successively won during the specific game that is being continued.

Next, the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c is configured to manage the progress status of the hold prefetching effect when the hold prefetching effect is executed over a plurality of variations of the main game symbol.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 is a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information.
), and have.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be capable of transmitting information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial setting (not shown), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the reset button ( It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM side (transmission at that timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at that timing and transmitted in a control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and saving in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information that is provided). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM). To do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (the RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the data (backup) in the RAM in the main control board M when the power is cut off. Various information commands are acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and will be described later). The control command transmission process may be used for transmission), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 9B is executed), and the process of step 1018 is performed. Transition. Note that after step 1018, the CPU MC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, increment processing of the random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt at about every 1.5 ms), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later in step 1100. .. Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric auditors product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (in particular, the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening in which the game ball has won. The prize payout control board KH is caused to execute the processing, and the processing for managing the result) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer H, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being executed.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power failure signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is cut off in the gaming machine, the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the time of NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the power cut-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. .. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflowed or passed in the case of a gate) the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding sphere in a form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of holdings. The process shifts to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in Steps 1102 and 1104, the process moves to the next process (process in Step 1200).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserve ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game shortened flag), and the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the acquired state. A stop symbol is determined based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and the main control board It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol "D0, D1, D2" is present, and the stop symbol which is the winning symbol is "D1, D2", which is caused by the stop of each. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing) and stopped. When the design is “D2”, the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.8 seconds→open for 5.0 seconds, close) (longest open). Also, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed), stop When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open→0.8 seconds closed→4.0 seconds open→closed). Incidentally, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time shortening game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time shortening game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer. After starting MP11t-H, the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol is fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1, D2 in this example). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the hit pattern on the auxiliary game side, open mode (for example, in the case of hit pattern "D1", open for 1 second → close for 1 second) →Open for 1 second →Close for 1 second →Open for 1 second →Open mode to be closed, in the case of winning symbol "D2", open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds) Then, a predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening/closing time) of the electric accessory is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes in step 1238, in step 1239, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1239, in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the information indicating that the longest opening of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is started. The opening start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In this embodiment, when the main game short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is kept open for the longest time. Has been done.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory has been reached. If Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric auditors product B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and sets the electric auditors open flag. Turn off. Next, in step 1248, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the second main game starting opening electric accessory B1.
The electric accessory longest opening end command to the sub side, which is information indicating that the longest opening of 1d has ended, is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

If step 1202 is No, the process proceeds to step 1242. If step 1204 is No, the process proceeds to step 1224. In this case, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting mouth entrance information is received from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main starting opening A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls regarding the main game (particularly the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning/non-winning lottery random number for determining the win/fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the first main game random number has been obtained (holding generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

Next, at step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game starting mouth entrance information from the second main game starting mouth entrance detecting device B11s of the second main game starting mouth B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls regarding the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the win/fail lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number, are acquired, as in the first main game content determination means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the win/loss lot number for the first main game and the win/loss lot number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the second main game random number has been obtained (holding generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). In addition, if No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the next process (the process of step 1400) is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted, but the information of the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and it is also possible to substitute the information indicating that the random number has been acquired from these information.

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400(1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and the following process {process 1400(1), process of (2)} } To move. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400(2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {steps 1400(1) and (2)) Processing}.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to give priority to executing the second main game symbol holding digest, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on the winning order or both main game symbols in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. In addition, since the processing is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not being changed, and the condition that the main game symbol is held is present. Although not shown in this example, when a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variation start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPU MC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and is the first main game content determination random number related to the present symbol variation ( While reading the second main game content determination random number), the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed. Shift (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol win/win lottery based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, winning lottery random number). To do.

Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win/loss lottery table (second main game win/loss lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the main game symbol win/win lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, symbol lottery random number) Stop symbols relating to the main game symbol are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A/5A/7A" and "4B/5B/7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B, and 16R for 7A, 7B. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. You may}. In the present embodiment, the average number of big hits related to the second main game side is larger than the average number of big hits related to the first main game side (8R×700/1024+16R×324/1024=10.5R). 8R x 400/1024 + 16R x 624/1024 = 12.9R) because there is more, one symbol change on the second main game side is more advantageous than one symbol change on the first main game side It has become. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the average number of big hits related to the first main game side and the average number of big hits related to the second main game side may be the same. Further, the average value of the number of actually executed rounds is the same for the big hit on the first main game side and the big hit on the second main game side, but the average value of the actual round numbers is the same as the big hit on the second main game side. It may be configured so that it is larger than the big hit on the first main game side. Here, the substantial number of rounds is the number of rounds in which it is easy to enter a game ball until a specified count is reached, in which the special winning opening is closed by opening for a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more), for example, Actually, it is a special game of 15 rounds, but if a long time (for example, 20 seconds or more) is opened for 8 rounds and a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is opened for 7 rounds, The actual number of rounds for special games is eight.

Next, in step 1411, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the normal game state (non-probability variation/non-time shortening game state), in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the main game symbol winning/winning lottery result and the first The main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number) is used to determine the variation mode of the main game symbol, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, Go to step 1414.

Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is configured to be determined based on the win/no win result of the main game symbol. That is, when the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying that it is good. Further, the symbol variation time of the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time saving flag is on) may be configured to be a relatively long time {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be held by decreasing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. This is particularly effective in the case where the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the probability variation game state, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1413, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1, and proceeds to step 1414.
Further, the processing of step 1413 may be configured to be executed immediately after the result of step 1420 becomes Yes (timing at which the variation time ends).

Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M, and A command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Sent to). Next, in step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550).

Next, in step 1420, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends information (symbol finalization display instruction command) indicating that the symbol variation is finished to the command transmission for transmitting to the sub-main controller SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) stop the variable display of the main game symbol, and display control the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter. Incidentally, in this example, after the special game related to all the big hit symbols, it is configured to shift to a specific game state (process of probability variation game state with limited number of times and time reduction game state). Next, in step 1440, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, in step 1500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process related to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first step range (80≧G>50). If Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery, and the next process (step 1413).

Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 1) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80≧G>50). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing. It should be noted that, when compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

On the other hand, if No in step 1452, in step 1456, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is within the second stage range (50≧G>10). Or not. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the main game side random number, the result of the lottery, the number of reserve balls on the second main game side, the variation mode of the main game symbol (variation time ) Is determined and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413).

Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 2) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50≧G>10). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing. It should be noted that, when compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average fluctuation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved ball.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1456, in other words, when the limited frequency counter value G is within the third stage range (10≧G), in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game side random number. Based on the result of the lottery, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413).

Here, FIG. 14 (limited frequency table 3) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (10≧G). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the winning/discarding lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

The content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side only at a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, at a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of holdings (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). If not so configured, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holdings, and the second main game side, when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more, the number of holdings It is desirable to configure so that the variation time is relatively shorter than when the number is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

In the present embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1→the limited frequency table 2→the limited frequency table 3 is switched in three stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST). No matter how many kinds of limited frequency tables are used, the order of the referenced tables can be changed without any problem. In addition, it has two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referred to is switched in the order of limited frequency table 1→limited frequency table 2→limited frequency table 1 as a three-step ST mode. Good.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M decrements the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c by 1. If Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag in step 1508, and proceeds to step 1510. Even if No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

Next, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550). Even if No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag/main game short time flag/auxiliary game short time flag). Next, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1562, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special game control process related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game shift permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if Yes in step 1610, the process moves to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been given, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an open pattern (for example, an open pattern that continues to open, a pattern that opens and closes). To do. Next, in step 1616, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). Open the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20), set a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to the special game timer MP34t (especially opening time timer) and start, and shift to step 1622. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control section SM side. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (in the control command transmission process of step 1999, the data is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process moves to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and the predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not has elapsed. If Yes in step 1626, the process moves to step 1628. In addition, in the case of No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). Is stopped and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum round number). .. If Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control section SM side. Set (Step 1
It is transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side in the control command transmission processing of 930). Then, in step 1650, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after completion of a special game described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 27, the control processing executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 7D is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM which is executed after resetting when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the CPU SC of the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received → Initializing the RAM on the sub side, when various information commands are received → Resetting performance related information at the time of power interruption in the RAM on the sub side). After that, the process shifts to a loop process of repeatedly executing (f) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of (f) of the same figure, first, in step 2050, the CPUSC of the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM causes a stay stage to be described later. Execute the decision process. Next, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a pending information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2900, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the display command transmission control processing (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends this repeating processing routine. To do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2050 to S2900) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6E is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is a terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control section SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state have been entered). If Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the specific game execution flag, and proceeds to step 2066.

Here, the specific game execution flag is a flag indicating that it is in a specific game (for example, a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state, so-called ST) state, and is turned on when the start of the specific game is triggered. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to be turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2052, in step 2058, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the specific game has ended {for example, by referring to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, or staying there. It is determined whether the value of the stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80 which is the upper limit number of STs)}. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the CPU SC of the sub control board S resets (zero-clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the specific game in-execution flag. Next, in step 2064, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a consecutive-game number counter SM23c2 (a counter that counts the number of consecutive big hits during a specific game, and the value is added in the process of step 2410 described later. ) Is reset (cleared to zero), and the process proceeds to step 2066. Even if No in step 2058, the process proceeds to step 2066.

Next, in step 2066, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 2066, in step 2068, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is newly stopped. If Yes in step 2068, in step 2070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S increments the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c by 1, and proceeds to step 2072. On the other hand, if No in step 2068, the process of step 2070 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2072.

Next, in step 2072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is a value within the first range (1 to 30). If Yes in step 2072, in step 2074, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a "short production stage" as a stay stage (temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the next process (step 2100). Process).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2072, in step 2076, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2076, in step 2078, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "long production stage" as the stay stage (temporarily storing in the RAM area), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100). ..

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2076, in step 2080, the CPU SC of the sub control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and determines whether the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. If Yes in step 2080, in step 2082, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a “fixed effect stage” as a stay stage (temporary storage in the RAM area), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2100). .. Even if No in Steps 2066 and 2080 (for example, when the specific game is not in progress), the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 2100).

In the present embodiment, the third stage (fixed production stage) has only one type (5 seconds in this example) and one type of production content (in this example, pre-reading time) regardless of the result of the lottery. Although the display contents are different at the time of non-prefetching, only the fixed time effect is provided as a system), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of effect contents in the third stage is smaller than that in the second stage (long effect stage). As a tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of both the variation pattern and the effect content is “second stage>first stage>third stage”.

With such a configuration, it is possible to switch the stay stage for determining the effect contents based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of symbol variations during the specific game.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric accessory longest opening start command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game starting opening electric auditors' prize B11d is started, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the electric auditors longest opening flag. It is turned on and the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2106, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new electric auditors product longest opening end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2106, in other words, when the longest opening of the second main game starting opening electric auditors' product B11d is completed, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the electric auditors product longest opening flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, if No in step 2106, the process proceeds to step 2110.

Here, the electric accessory longest open flag is a period during which the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the open mode in which the time for which the second main game start mouth electric accessory B11d is kept open at one time is the longest (longest open). It is a flag that is turned on, and the hold generated when the electric accessory longest opening flag is on is used to determine that the hold is based on the entry of the longest opening gaming ball. It is a flag. In the present embodiment, the electric accessory longest opening flag is turned on only during non-time shortening games.

Next, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new hold generation command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is received from the main control substrate M side. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing suspension counter (in this example, maximum four for the first main game and maximum four for the second main game). 1” is added (incremented). Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, the winning lottery The random number/symbol lottery random number/variation mode lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the electric accessory longest-opening flag is on. If Yes in step 2116, in step 2118 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the hold temporarily stored in the RAM area of the new sub control board S is the hold of the second main game side. .. If Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates in the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S that the hold occurred when the electric accessory was opened for the longest time. Information is added, and the process proceeds to step 2122. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2116 or step 2118, the process of step 2120 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2122.

Next, in step 2122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S preliminarily determines the success/failure result of each suspension based on the suspension information (in particular, the random selection random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2124, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a winning (big hit) holding among the holdings consumed before the new holding based on the preliminary determination result. judge. If Yes in step 2124, in step 2150, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a prefetching effect execution determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2142. On the other hand, if No in step 2124, the process of step 2150 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2142. Next, in step 2142, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS to suspend the drawing on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display section SG12 and the second hold display section SG13). The same number of hold display lamps as the counter value are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, in step 2130, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2130, in step 2132, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2134, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the pending information related to the symbol variation, and the remaining pending information.

Next, in step 2136, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the exhausted hold is the hold that occurred when the electric auditors' article was opened for the longest time. If Yes in step 2136, in step 2138, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the longest-opening holding effect permission flag, and proceeds to step 2140. On the other hand, if No in step 2136, the process of step 2138 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2140. In addition, the production for holding at the time of longest opening occurs only at the time of changing the symbol related to the ball entry when entering the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d at the time of longest opening of the electric accessory. It is an effect, and examples thereof include a change in the hold display mode and a change in the selected effect content (change in the background and advance notice content).

Next, in step 2140, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2142. In addition, in the case of No in step 2130, the process of steps 2132 to 2140 is not executed, the process proceeds to step 2142, the hold display process is executed, and then the process (process of step 2200) proceeds. To do.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect execution determination processing related to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the newly generated hold is the second main game side hold. If Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored) is the “long production stage”.

If Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold information (especially, the variation mode determination random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, the new hold. Predetermine the fluctuation time of. Next, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has been determined that the new suspension change time will be a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more. Here, when the variation time is preliminarily determined, for example, when the variation mode random value of the new suspension is 900 to 1023, the variation time is 10 seconds or more regardless of the number of suspensions when the new suspension is consumed. It can be determined (see FIG. 12).

In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold (for example, based on a win/loss lottery random number). If Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a pre-reading effect lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, in step 2166 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5, but the probability is lower than the winning probability in step 2164). The pre-reading effect lottery is performed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2168, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set (temporarily stored in the RAM area) is the “fixed production stage”. If Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big jackpot hold (for example, based on a win/loss lottery random number). In the case of Yes in step 2170, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the pre-reading effect lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, if No in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins in step 2174 with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6, but the probability is lower than the winning probability in step 2172). The pre-reading effect lottery is performed, and the process proceeds to step 2176.

Next, in step 2176, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a pre-reading effect lottery (any one of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, and step 2174) has been won. If Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the number of holdings temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the holding (trigger holding) won in the lottery is exhausted. The number Ha (0 to 4 times) of fluctuation stop of the main game symbol until it is derived. Next, in step 2180, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and based on the counter value, derives the variable stop count Hb of the main game symbol until the current stay stage ends. ..

Here, the fluctuation stop count Hb also includes the fluctuation stop count of the symbol currently displayed in a variable manner. Further, whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is determined at the start of the change, as will be described later. Therefore, when the symbol is changing, the pre-reading effect can be executed from the next change in which the changing symbol is stopped. is there.

Next, in step 2182, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines that the number of pre-reading effects (Ha in this example) is the minimum number of pre-reading effects (the minimum number of times for executing effective pre-reading effects, for example, (2 times) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S satisfies the relationship Ha≦Hb with respect to the derived Ha and Hb (prefetch effect ends during the current stay stage). Or not. If Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the CPU SC of the sub control board S sets Ha in the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2142). In addition, even when it is No in any of step 2152, step 2154, step 2160, step 2168, step 2176, step 2182, and step 2184, it transfers to the following process (process of step 2142).

In this way, by configuring the prefetching effect not to be executed when the prefetching effect over a plurality of changes does not end during the current stay stage (in particular, step 2184), the table switching and the prefetching effect are executed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation that confuses the player. In the present embodiment, after executing the prefetching effect lottery, whether or not to execute the prefetching effect is determined according to the determination whether to cross the stay stage, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the prefetching effect The order of may be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be configured to execute the prefetch effect lottery after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed (that is, when it is planned to cross the stay stage, In the first place, it is meant to include a configuration that does not execute the look-ahead production lottery itself).

The look-ahead effect in this example is an effect that occurs even with a change related to trigger hold, that is, the plurality of changes in the look-ahead effect over a plurality of changes may include a change related to the trigger hold. For example, effects of the same aspect or effects of the same system may be effects that occur from a change before a change related to trigger hold to a change related to the trigger hold.

Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the end of the look-ahead effect over a plurality of variations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the look-ahead effect can be executed. When the look-ahead effect over a plurality of changes straddles the end (or switch) of the stay stage, the expectation that a big hit in any change related to the look-ahead effect does not cross the end (or switch) of the stay stage. It may be configured to be relatively higher than when the performance is being executed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the look-ahead effect is generated across the end (or changeover) of the stay stage (and the effect), and the interest of the game is increased. It is possible to improve the sex.

Further, when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations can be executed even after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, when the pre-reading effect can be executed, the pre-reading effect is until the final fluctuation when the current stay stage ends. It may be configured to end (interrupt) with. Further, when the pre-reading effect is interrupted, a pre-reading effect different from the interrupted pre-reading effect (for example, a pre-reading effect or another effect suitable for the effect at the stay stage after the switching) is configured to be executed instead. May be.

Further, in a certain stay stage, a look-ahead effect that notifies that a high-expectation effect or a variation mode having a long variation time is selected in the subsequent change occurs, and the high-expectation effect or the high-expectation effect is generated in the certain stay stage. When the variation mode having a long variation time is not selected, the high expectation effect or the variation mode having a long variation time may be selected in the next stay stage. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the look-ahead effect in the next stay stage is an effect suitable for the next stay stage.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7,7,7" etc. , If the pattern is a lost pattern, then a variation such as “1/3/5”} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, in step 2250, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes an effect content determination process described later. Next, in step 2208, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the effect contents determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S
Determines whether the specific game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest-opening holding effect permission flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the CPU SC of the sub control board S, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, the effect content determination table SM25ta {especially, the normal time table (longest open hold effect effect flag off}). }, the effect contents are determined and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

On the other hand, if No in step 2254, in step 2258, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest-opening hold effect permission flag. Next, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the longest-opening hold effect execution flag. Next, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta {especially, the normal time table (longest open time hold effect permission flag on})} based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. To determine the contents of the effect, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2208).

Here, FIG. 25 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal time production content determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the production in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and as shown in the figure, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. One effect content is determined from a plurality of effect content candidates. When the longest opening hold effect permission flag is turned on, the same effect as the effect during the "long effect stage" stay is determined (the longest hold effect effect flag is set. When it is "OFF", the player can easily recognize that it is a change related to the hold that occurred at the longest opening time, because the production during the "long production stage" stay does not occur during the non-time shortening game. it can). Note that this example is merely an example, and the production contents, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited to this, and for example, the variation mode (and the winning/winning lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number are used for rendering. It may be configured to determine the content (may be configured to be able to execute different effects when the variation mode on the main game side is the same).

Returning to the description of the flowchart, on the other hand, if No in step 2252, that is, if the current game state is the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the counter concerned It is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (a situation in which the prefetch effect is executed). If Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the CPU SC of the sub control board S subtracts 1 from the value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stay stage currently set is the “long production stage”. If Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S directs the prefetch effect dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “at the time of XX times...!” at the start of variation, the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. A command for displaying the effect of counting down the value) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2274.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2268, in other words, when the prefetching effect is executed in the "fixed effect stage", in step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the winning or hitting stage when the "fixed effect stage" changes. The content of the effect is determined to be a look-ahead effect dedicated to the stage (for example, an effect in which the background display color changes based on the jackpot expectation degree), and the process proceeds to step 2274. Even if No in step 2264, the process moves to step 2274.

Next, in step 2274, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta (particularly, a table for a specific game) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol and the currently set stay stage. To determine the effect contents, and perform the next process (step 2208).
Process).

Here, the specific game effect content determination table of FIG. 25 is a table that is referred to when determining the effect in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (80 STs in this example), and is shown in the figure. As described above, the effect contents are configured to be switched depending on the set stay stage (the number of fluctuations during ST) (corresponding to the changing mode/changing time of the main game symbol, the effect contents are also switched. Is configured). To explain using an example of the effect contents, the fixed time effect that is the effect selected in the “fixed effect stage” is, as shown in the image diagram in the lower part of the figure, first, the variation of the decorative design is started, and the design is changed. When the image related to the change is displayed for 1 second, the effect in the winning/defying stage is displayed for 1 second. Here, the effect at the stage of winning or rejecting is an image prompting the operation of the sub input button SB when the pre-reading effect is not executed. After the effect is displayed, the operation of the sub input button SB is performed, or further 1 second. Is passed, the display shifts to the effect display at the hit/notification stage. On the other hand, if the pre-reading effect is being executed, the effect in the hit/damage stage is an effect of changing the display color of the background image determined in the process of step 2268 (that is, an effect of prompting the operation of the sub input button SB does not occur). ), and when 1 second elapses after the performance display, the display shifts to the performance display at the hit/notification stage. Next, in the hit/not-notice stage, an effect is given to inform the player whether the variation is a hit or a loss. When the prefetching effect continues, the execution state of the prefetching effect (background display color in this example) may be continued until the end of the prefetching effect. When the fixed time has elapsed), an image for notifying the result of the change is displayed. Note that this example is merely an example, and the production contents, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited to this, and for example, the variation mode (and the winning/winning lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number are used for rendering. It may be configured to determine the content (may be configured to be able to execute different effects when the variation mode on the main game side is the same). Further, although not particularly shown in this example, a dedicated effect (for example, super battle reach/special battle reach, etc.) is executed at any of the stay stages during the specific game even when the first main game side is playing out the hold. It may be configured to obtain. In addition, the effect for urging the operation of the sub input button SB may be configured not to be executed in a situation where it is difficult to secure the effect execution scale (for example, during the stay in the “short effect stage” in this example). It is suitable.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2306, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol variation flag. Next, in step 2309, the CPU SC of the sub control board S starts the mounting variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2310, in step 2311 the CPU SC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2312, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the variable display command of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). , And proceeds to step 2330.

On the other hand, if No in step 2312, in step 2316, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2316, in step 2318, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub sub control unit SS side). Then, the process moves to step 2330.

On the other hand, if No in step 2316, in step 2320, whether the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the display timing of the notice image or reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image or reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set). Is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. If Yes in step 2330, in step 2331, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Be done). Next, in step 2332, the CPU SC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero-clears) the mounting variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2334, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol variation flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2400). Even if No in step 2310 or step 2330, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit (a big hit in the non-probability variation/non-time shortening game state). If Yes in step 2406, the process moves to step 2410. On the other hand, if No in step 2406 (first hit), in step 2408 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the longest-opening hold effect production flag is on. If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if N=first hit, in step 2409, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the longest-opening hold effect production flag, and proceeds to step 2410.

Next, in step 2410, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S adds 1 (increments) to the value of the number-of-combinations-counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2408, the process proceeds to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412 and step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag and displays a big hit start on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the kind of big hit). , And proceeds to step 2416. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

Next, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game performance and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type etc.). Next, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (for example, 10). If Yes in step 2418, in step 2420
The CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the jackpot in execution is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 16R jackpot and the jackpot according to the 7A/7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the ending effect {predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of coins obtained during consecutive games, identification of a plurality of types). All the effects are generated, and one or more combinations such as conditions are satisfied) are set, and the command relating to the display of the effect during the special game or the specific game displayed} is set, and the process proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, in the case of No in either step 2418 or step 2420, in step 2424, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command relating to the big hit progress display, and proceeds to step 2426.

With such a configuration, based on the number of consecutive hits of the big hit (not counting the first hit), it is possible to make the effect displayed during the big hit execution a special effect, and the second main game starting opening. When a big hit occurs due to a hold caused by a ball entering during the longest opening of the electric accessory B11d, even if the big hit is a first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive games, so the second main game starting opening electric role It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of a change related to the hold that occurs during the longest opening of the object B11d. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as the ending effect generation conditions, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit in the specific effect). , Etc.) may be regarded as being satisfied.

Next, in step 2426, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S displays a big hit end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the kind of big hit). Next, in step 2430, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900). Even if No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Action)
Next, the operation of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing the prefetch effect during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the specific game is finished without winning the big hit.

First, under the condition of probability variation game state and time shortening game state, the reserve balls on the first main game side are exhausted and the reserve balls on the second main game side become four, and then at the timing 1 in the figure. , The fluctuation of the second main game symbol will start. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the short game stage ends and the process shifts to the long game stage when the main game symbol changes 30 times after the special game.

Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger hold that can trigger the execution of the prefetching effect. At this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger hold is exhausted is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long effect stage is 40 (Ha≦Hb), the prefetch effect is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first variation of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the variation.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol relating to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long production stage has a change time of 10 seconds or more, and thus has a change time of 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the look-ahead effect is ended when the fluctuation of the main game symbol relating to the trigger hold is ended.

Next, at timing 7 in the figure, the trigger hold that may be a trigger for executing the prefetching effect is generated, so that it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger hold is exhausted is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long performance stage is 1 (Ha>Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will not be done. Next, at the timing of 8 in the drawing, the long game stage ends and the process shifts to the fixed game stage when the main game symbol changes 70 times after the special game.

Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed due to the occurrence of the trigger hold that can be the trigger for executing the prefetching effect. At this timing, the number Ha of fluctuation stops until the trigger hold is exhausted is 2 and the number Hb of fluctuation stops until the end of the fixed effect stage is 10 (Ha≦Hb), so the prefetch effect is executed. Will be done. Next, at the timing 10 in the figure, since the first variation of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the variation. Next, at the timing 11 in the figure, the look-ahead effect will be ended when the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold is ended. Since the pre-reading effect is the pre-reading effect on the fixed effect stage, the variation time related to the trigger hold is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing 12 in the figure, the fixed performance stage ends and the specific game also ends when the main game symbol changes 80 times after the special game.

Next, the operation of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case where the long production stage is finished without winning the big hit is illustrated.

First, under the situation of probability variation game state and time shortening game state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol which is the first variation in the specific game is started. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of loss, the limited frequency table 1 on the first main game side and the limited frequency table 1 on the second main game side have the same table contents, and do not depend on the number of holdings. .. In this case, the content of the table surrounded by the dotted line in the limited frequency table 1 is X. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is reduced from two to one.

Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the second variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. At the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to the present timing, the first main game side has only one hold, and at the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to the timing 1 in the figure, the first main game side has the hold. Although the number is one, the table content to be referenced is X regardless of the number of reservations.

Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the third variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Further, due to the variation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the fifth variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of reserve balls on the second main game side is reduced from 3 to 2. At the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to this timing, the second main game side has a hold of three, and at the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to the timing 3 in the figure, the second main game side has a hold. Although the number is one, the table content to be referenced is X regardless of the number of reservations.

As described above, in this example, at the time of the short performance stage, regardless of whether it is the fluctuation of the first main game side or the fluctuation of the second main game side, and regardless of the number of holdings, the fluctuation mode is determined The contents of the referenced tables are the same.

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the main game symbol, which is the 30th variation in the specific game, ends, so the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage is switched to. Next, at the timing 6 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the 31st variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Z. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one. Next, at the timing 7 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the 32nd variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Y. Further, due to the variation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is changed from 1 to 0. At the start of fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to this timing, the second main game side has a hold of one, and at the start of fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to timing 6 in the figure, the second main game side has a hold. Since the number is two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of reservations (Y and Z).

Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the 33rd variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Z. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the 34th variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Y. Also, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. At the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to this timing, the first main game side has one hold, and at the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to the timing 8 in the figure, the first main game side does not hold. Since the number is two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of reservations (Y and Z).

As described above, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode are the same regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the long production stage. However, if the numbers of holdings are different, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode may be different.

The contents of the table at the time of determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game are not limited to this, and an example of the action will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a variation mode of the main game symbol during the specific game after the end of the special game. In this example, the case where the long production stage is finished without winning the big hit is illustrated.

First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the second variation in the specific game, is started. Further, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on whether the first main game side is held or not at the time of losing. The case where there is a hold on the first main game side is X'. When there is no hold on the first main game side, Y'is set. The table content referred to when the timing changes is X'because there is a hold on the first main game side. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one. Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the fourth variation in the specific game, is started. Due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol, which is the fifth variation in the specific game, is started. The table content referred to when the timing changes is Y'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Further, due to the fluctuation, the number of holding balls on the second main game side is reduced from two to one.

As described above, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode on the second main game side during the short effect stage are configured to differ depending on whether or not the first main game side holds the hold.

Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, the variation of the main game symbol, which is the 30th variation in the specific game, is completed, so the short production stage ends and the production stage is switched to the long production stage. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol which is the 32nd variation in the specific game is started, and at the timing of 6 in the figure, the 35th variation of the specific main game which is the second main game. The fluctuation of the design is started. At the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol at the timing of 5 in the figure, the first main game side has one hold, while the fluctuation of the second main game symbol at the timing of 6 in the figure starts. At the time, the number of holdings on the first main game side is 0, but the table contents referred to when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol are the same, and the variation time is 10 seconds. ing.

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol is predetermined in the game during the probability fluctuation game state with limited number of times (and the time reduction game state). When the number of times is reached, the candidates of the variation mode (variation time) to be selected are different (switched). Also, by changing the effect contents in accordance with the change of the variation mode, if the aspect of the effect is different according to the progress of the game in the specific game {probability variation game state with limited number of times (and time shortening game state)} It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Further, although not particularly shown in the present example, when there is a big hit hold (in particular, a hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, by executing a special effect, the big hit hold It is possible to produce a big hit related to in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 6 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are Step 1636 (Mod 1) to Step 1800 (Mod 1), and the purpose is to execute the end demo. That is, when the final round of the special game is over, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration execution permission flag in step 1636 (variation 1), and proceeds to step 1638 (variation 1). Next, in step 1638 (1st variation), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1638 (1st variation), in step 1800 (1st variation), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ending demo time control process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). .. Even if No in step 1638 (1st variant), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variation 1) of FIG. 31 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution flag is off. If Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the long demo time jackpot symbol (7A, 7B in this example). If Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a long time (for example, 10 seconds) to the end demo time timer (the main timer for measuring the end demo time of the special game). After setting and starting, the process proceeds to step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1804, in other words, when the stop symbol is the short demo time jackpot symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the end demo time timer in step 1808. A short time (for example, 3 seconds) is set and started, and the process proceeds to step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub side and a command related to the decided end demo time information (step 1999 by the control command transmission process, the sub main control unit SM). Sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the end demonstration in progress flag, and proceeds to step 1814. Even if No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

Next, in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the end demo execution flag. Next, in step 1818, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the end demo execution permission flag. Next, in step 1820, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1650, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the above-mentioned game state determination process after the end of the special game, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1814, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 19 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are Step 2480 (Mod 1) to Step 2600 (Mod 1), and the purpose is to execute the end demonstration effect and the end demo extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, in step 2480 (variation 1), the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the end demo time is a long time (10 seconds). If Yes in step 2480 (variation 1), in step 2482 (variation 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the demo time display timer to a long time (for example, 10 seconds) and starts, and then proceeds to step 2486 (variation 1). Change to 1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2480 (variation 1), in step 2484 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the demo time display timer to a short time (for example, 3 seconds) and starts, It shifts to 2486 (Mod 1).

Next, in step 2486 (1st variation), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying an end demo image (for example, an image notifying the number of game balls acquired, the number of consecutive games, etc.) (step 2900). It is transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process). Next, in step 2488 (1st variation), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the end demo display flag, and proceeds to step 2490 (1st variation). Even if No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to step 2490 (variation 1).

By changing as described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the special game is finished, the end demonstration effect for notifying the result of the special game and the like can be executed, and after the end of the demonstration effect. (After the special game), a predetermined period after the start of fluctuation of the main game symbol (specific game) (when there is a big hit hold, until just before the end of the big hit change, if there is no big hit hold, it relates to the hold that exists at the moment Until the end of the change), by displaying the effect substantially the same as the demonstration effect (for example, while the main game symbol is changing, continuously displaying an image notifying the result of the special game, etc.) When there is a big hit hold in the hold, it is configured that the image substantially the same as the demonstration effect is displayed until just before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold, so for the player After the special game is over, it suddenly becomes the next big hit without changing during the specific game, and the special game is recognized as if it was restarted. It will be possible. In addition, by changing the execution time of the end demo effect depending on the main game symbol that was won in the jackpot, the player can perform the end demonstration effect and the same effect as the end demonstration effect while the main game symbol is changing. Is indistinguishable,
The interest of the game will be enhanced.

Next, in step 2490 (1st variation), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the end demo display flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2490 (variant 1), in step 2492 (variant 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets the demo time display timer (sub-side timer for measuring the end demo time of the special game) value. It is determined whether it is 0 or not. If Yes in step 2492 (variant 1), in step 2600 (variant 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes an ending demo extension effect execution process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). To do. In addition, in the case of No in step 2490 (variant 1) or step 2492 (variant 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900).

(Second embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, after the special game is finished, the number of times is always changed to the probability variation game state with a limited number of times, and the production of the interest of the game is changed by gradually switching the effect during the period of the probability variation game state. Configured to improve. However, with the configuration of the present embodiment, it is not possible to fuel the player's expectation in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state depending on the big hit symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter, inside the second special winning opening C20. In addition, the game machine according to the second embodiment is configured such that a game ball enters a specific area C22 during execution of a special game, thereby shifting to a probability variation game arcade state after the end of the special game (so-called ball game. Machine).

First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1408 (second), step 14012-1 (second) and step 1412-2 (second), the purpose of which is a non-stochastic variation game state and time reduction. The variation mode in the game state is different from that shown in the present embodiment. That is, after determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1408 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes in step 1408 (second), in step 1412-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode of the main game symbol based on the main game side random number/win/win lottery result. On the other hand, if No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411 and the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1411, that is, if the limited frequency counter value is 0, in step 1412-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game based on the main game side random number/win/win lottery result. The variation mode of the symbol is determined. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, the same processing as this embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

Here, FIG. 35 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of main game symbols that is a big hit is different, and that a table to be referred to in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols to be a big hit, the main game symbol in which a special game in which a game ball is easily inserted into a specific area is executed is "5A/7A/3B/5B/7B" and is specified. The main game symbol in which the special game in which the game ball is difficult to enter the area is executed is "2A".

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 6 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), the purpose of which is distribution game (a unit game that opens the second special winning opening C20 having a specific area). ) Can be performed. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1608 or when the special game execution flag is on, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is It is determined whether the round to be executed is the distribution game execution round (second R, 4R in this example). If Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution processing described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (second), the process moves to step 1612, and the same processing as in the present embodiment is executed.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 36 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game in-execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, if No in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second special winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot pattern that opens for a time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds as an opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). , An opening pattern designed so that the entry into the specific area C22 is definite, is set, and the routine proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. -(For example, an opening pattern designed to make the non-entering ball into the specific area C22 deterministic by opening for 0.1 second) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the second embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A/7A", and the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "524/1024", which is the second main game. The long open symbol on the side is "3B, 5B, 7B", and the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "1024/1024", so the second main game side than the big hit on the first main game side. The large jackpot is configured so that the second big winning opening C20 is long open in the distribution game execution round, that is, the gaming ball is easy to enter the specific area C22 during the big hit.

Next, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 1864, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. .. If Yes in step 1866, the process moves to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1866, at step 1868, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process moves to step 1870. Next, in step 1870, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1872, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game in-execution flag. Next, in step 1874, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1874, in step 1876, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation shift reservation flag, and shifts to step 1878. Even if No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, in step 1878, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1868, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 36 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1680 (second), step 1682 (second), step 1684 (second) and step 1686 (second), the purpose of which is the second embodiment. In the distribution game to be executed at, it is to change the upper limit value of the number of fluctuations in the probability variation game state and the number of fluctuations in the time reduction game state depending on whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22. That is, when executing this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation shift reservation flag. Next, in steps 1652 and 1654, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) to the probability variation counter MP51c and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the limited frequency counter MN52c a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example). Next, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as in the present embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, if No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the time saving counter MP52c to set a predetermined number B (in this example, 50 times, but Is not limited. A value equal to or smaller than the predetermined number of times A is preferable.), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

Here, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22 during the special game, it is configured to shift to the time reduction game state after the end of the special game. In addition, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time-reduced game state after the special game is the same as the predetermined number of times A in the probability fluctuation game state. (80 times in this example), and when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations in the time shortening game state after the special game is different from the predetermined number A (small. ) The number of times is a predetermined number B (50 times in this example). In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol in the time shortening game state, in the time shortening game state of the predetermined number of times A, there are three limited frequency tables (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3). The main game table 3-2 is referred to in the time shortened game state of the predetermined number of times B, and the table of different effect contents is also referred to. In addition, the configuration is applied to the case where the big hit symbols that have triggered the execution of the special game are the same or different (for example, even if the special game is triggered by the same big hit symbol, the special game is executed). The number of times saved depends on whether or not the player enters the specific area C22). In addition, this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation upper limit number of the time-reducing game may be determined based on the symbol at the time of a big hit (for example, during a special game). If the ball is not entered into the specific area C22, the maximum number of fluctuations of the time-reducing game is determined by the big hit symbol, etc.).

Next, FIG. 39 is an example of an effect content determination table in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that it has an effect content determination table that is referred to in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state, which is illustrated in the lower right part of the figure. In the second embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the special game, the game state after the special game does not become the probability variation game state but the non-probability variation/time reduction game state (50 variations). ). In that case, the content of the effect is determined by referring to the table. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the number of times of change, the contents of effect, the manner of change, the configuration of the table, and the like are not limited to these.

As described above, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the special game according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the special game is executed (specific area). In the gaming machine (so-called Tamakoshi type gaming machine) that does not shift to the probability fluctuation game state without entering the ball, it shifts to the probability fluctuation game state without entering the probability fluctuation game state. Probability production is performed according to the profit aspect of the player by making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state. You can do it. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the sorting game, a special effect (an effect that stimulates whether or not the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long, entering a specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect that stirs whether or not a ball is made, an effect that notifies that a ball has been entered into the specific area C22, etc. (the execution mode is not particularly limited, but, for example, In the case of an effect that informs that a specific area C22 has been entered, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG of the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG are set at the timing (immediately after that). It is possible to exemplify a configuration in which the notification is executed by an effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable object accessory or light guide plate for effect) (for example, on the effect display device SG. An image drawn as "V" is displayed, or the movable movable part for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where production is possible, or by irradiating light to the light guide plate, an image is formed on the light guide plate. Make it stand out, etc.)}.

Further, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes in the unit game (round) in which the second special winning opening C20 is in an open state (for example, two types). Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or equal to one firing interval of a game ball), and a predetermined period after opening for the first time A second unit game that can be opened (or opened and closed) again for a second time period longer than the first time period after closing the time period. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the completion of the opening operation for the first time when the probability of transition to probability fluctuation is low, It is possible to provide the possibility that the opening operation for the second time, which has a high degree of expectation for the transition to fluctuations, is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or longer than one firing interval of a game ball or more than (half of the upper limit number of winning prizes in the round)×(game) in order to guarantee entry into a specific area. It is more preferable that it is equal to or more than one shot interval of the ball), or more than (upper limit winning number of the round)×(one shot interval of the game ball) or more.

As described above, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the special game according to the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the special game is executed (specific area). In the gaming machine (so-called Tamakoshi type gaming machine) that does not shift to the probability fluctuation game state without entering the ball, it shifts to the probability fluctuation game state without entering the probability fluctuation game state. Probability production is performed according to the profit aspect of the player by making the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state different from the variation mode (and effect) in the probability variation game state. You can do it. Although not particularly shown in this example, when executing the sorting game, a special effect (an effect that stimulates whether or not the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long, entering a specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect that stirs whether or not a ball is made, an effect that notifies that a ball has been entered into the specific area C22, etc. (the execution mode is not particularly limited, but, for example, In the case of an effect that informs that a specific area C22 has been entered, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG of the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG are set at the timing (immediately after that). It is possible to exemplify a configuration in which the notification is executed by an effect device provided on the front surface (for example, a so-called movable object accessory or light guide plate for effect) (for example, on the effect display device SG. An image drawn as "V" is displayed, or the movable movable part for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where production is possible, or by irradiating light to the light guide plate, an image is formed on the light guide plate. Make it stand out, etc.)}.

Further, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of opening modes in the unit game (round) in which the second special winning opening C20 is in an open state (for example, two types). Specifically, although not particularly shown, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or equal to one firing interval of a game ball), and a predetermined period after opening for the first time A second unit game that can be opened (or opened and closed) again for a second time period longer than the first time period after closing the time period. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the completion of the opening operation for the first time when the probability of transition to probability fluctuation is low, It is possible to provide the possibility that the opening operation for the second time, which has a high degree of expectation for the transition to fluctuations, is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during the special game. In addition, it is preferable that the second time is equal to or longer than one firing interval of a game ball or more than (half of the upper limit number of winning prizes in the round)×(game) in order to guarantee entry into a specific area. It is more preferable that it is equal to or more than one shot interval of the ball), or more than (upper limit winning number of the round)×(one shot interval of the game ball) or more.

In addition, in the gaming machine (so-called ball certain machine) that can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game as in the second embodiment, ( 1) Only one special winning opening is provided, and a normal round (a round in which entry into the specific area C22 is invalid) and a distribution game execution round (entering into the specific area C22) (2) a special winning opening A and a special winning opening B having a specific area C22 are provided, and a normal round is executed at the big winning opening A, and the special winning opening B is executed. At (3) the special winning opening A and the special winning opening B having the specific area C22 are vertically overlapped (the big winning opening B is on the upper side). A regular round is executed at the special winning opening A, a distribution game execution round is executed at the special winning opening B, and entry into the specific area C22 can be effective only during execution of the distribution game execution round. (4) The special winning opening A and the special winning opening B having the specific area C22 are arranged so as to vertically overlap with each other (the big winning opening B is on the upper side), and the normal winning opening A is a round. The game ball can enter the specific area C22 only during the execution of the distribution game execution round by executing the distribution game execution round at the special winning opening B (the shielding member is provided and the shielding is performed). If the member is in the open state, it is easy to enter the specific area C22, and if the shielding member is in the closed state, it is difficult to enter the specific area C22).

(First modification from the second embodiment)
In addition, in the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game and shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game has been exemplified. The configuration is not limited to the two embodiments. Therefore, a configuration having a specific region C22 different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

First, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the first modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is illustrated, that is, the number of prize balls of the first main game starting opening A10 is 3 and the second main game starting opening B10. The number of prize balls in the first prize hole C10 is 15, the number of prize balls in the second prize hole C20 is 13, and the number of prize balls in the general prize hole is It is 10 balls. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the number of prize balls of the second special winning opening C20 is smaller than that of the first special winning opening C10.

Next, FIG. 41 shows the first (second) main game symbol display process relating to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 11 in the first modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1450 (second variation 1), step 1431-1 (second variation 1) and step 1431-2 (second variation 1), that is, step 1411. If the limited frequency counter value is not 0, in step 1450 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described below, and proceeds to step 1413.

In step 1440, after turning on the condition device operation flag, in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is the limit frequency jackpot symbol (the time after the jackpot is shortened. It is a big hit symbol that becomes a limited frequency state after the game state is finished, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7B). If Yes in step 1431-1 (second variation 1), in step 1431-2 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency counter to a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Set and shift to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 1) of FIG. 13 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the first step range (100≧G>21). In the case of Yes in step 1451-1, in step 1451-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3, and based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery, the variation mode relating to the main game symbol ( The change time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1451-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1453-1 whether the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the second stage range (G=21). To do. Incidentally, when the limited frequency counter value is 21, it is the final variation in the time shortened gaming state. If Yes in step 1451-3, in step 1451-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state. If Yes in step 1451-4, in step 1451-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 1, and based on the main game side random number and the win/loss lottery result, the variation mode relating to the main game symbol (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1413). In addition, in the case of No in step 1451-4, it moves to step 1451-2 and refers to the main game table 3 to determine the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol. In this way, in the first modification from the second embodiment, in the final variation of the time-reduced game state, when determining the variation mode depending on whether it is the probability variation game state or the non-stochastic variation game state. The table referred to is different, in other words, when the game ball in the specific area C22 during the execution of the big hit according to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" The table referred to when determining the variation mode in the final symbol variation of the time shortening game state is configured to be different. In addition, in the case of No in step 1451-3, in step 1451-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table 2, and relates to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery. The variation mode (variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). In the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, when the above-described big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, and the time saving counter MP52c is set. Is set 80 times. Since it is configured in this way, when the limited frequency counter value is not within the first stage range, that is, when the limited frequency counter value is 20 or less, the non-time reduction game state and the limited frequency counter value are 0. It will be a bigger situation. By configuring the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency table in such a case, when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, "the symbol" A transition will be made such as "time shortening game state of 80 times of variation → limited frequency state of 20 symbol variations (non-time shortening game state)". In addition, it is not limited to such a configuration, and in the time shortening game state, the limited frequency state A (the limited frequency table to be referred to is “limited frequency table A1→limited frequency table A2→limited” in the period of 80 symbol variations. Frequency table A3"), and the limited frequency state B (the limited frequency table to be referred to is the "limited frequency") in the period of 20 symbol variations after the time shortened game state ends and the non-time shortened game state transitions. Only the table B1”), that is, the limited frequency state may be configured so as not to cross different gaming states. In addition, when "7B" which is the limit frequency big hit symbol is won, 80 times is set to the time saving counter MP52c regardless of whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to "7B". The limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, that is, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the time reduction game state. When the limited frequency counter value is a non-zero big hit, it may be considered as a big hit in the condominium, and the above-mentioned condominium count value may be added (the time-saving game state is Even if it has ended, if you win the big hit in a limited frequency state, you may consider it as a big hit of Renso. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the limit frequency jackpot symbol “7B” is won, if the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game execution related to the “7B”, the hour/hour counter MP52c is displayed. While 80 times is set and the limited frequency counter is set to 100 times, when the player does not enter the specific area C22, 50 times is set to the time saving counter MP52c and 70 times is set to the limited frequency counter. It may be configured to. Further, in the case where the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, if the player does not enter the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", in the time shortening game state after the special game is finished. In the final variation, the variation mode of the main game symbol may be determined by referring to the limited frequency table (for example, limited frequency table 3) referred to only in the final variation. Note that the contents of the limited frequency table 3 may be configured so that a uniform variation time of 7 seconds is determined regardless of whether the hit or the loss occurs, regardless of the number of holdings. Further, in the case where the limit frequency jackpot symbol "7B" is won, if the player does not enter the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to the "7B", in the time shortening game state after the special game is finished. The limited frequency table to be referred to in the final variation, the limited frequency to be referred to in the final variation in the time reduction game state after the end of the special game when the player enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game related to "7B" The tables may be configured to be the same, and in such a case, the effect content and the effect tendency in the final variation in the time reduction game state may be the same.

Here, FIG. 43 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are that the combination of main game symbols, which is a big hit, is different, and that a limited frequency table is provided. In addition, among the main game symbols to be a big hit, the main game symbol that the special game in which the game ball easily enters the specific area is executed is "5A/7A/3B/5B/7B" and is specified. The main game symbol in which the special game in which the game ball is difficult to enter the area is executed is "4A". In addition, when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, the time shifts to the symbol shortening time of 80 times and shifts to the gaming state (the variation time is determined with reference to the main game table 3). ), when the 80 times of symbol fluctuations are finished, it shifts to a limited frequency state of 20 times of symbol fluctuations (variation time is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 2). Incidentally, in the case of the limited frequency state referring to the limited frequency table 2, the variation time of the main game symbol is configured so that a long time that exceeds 10 seconds is not selected regardless of the winning/winning lottery result. Also, in the final variation of the time-saving game state (80th variation after the completion of the big hit), which is transferred when the big hit related to the limit frequency big hit symbol "7B" is finished, it is specified during the execution of the "7B". When there is a ball entering the area C22, the variation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 1. On the other hand, when there is no ball entering the specific area C22 during execution of the "7B", it is mainly determined. The variation mode is determined by referring to the game table 3 (the shortest variation time in the loss of the limited frequency table 1 is longer than the shortest variation time in the loss of the main game table 3) .. In addition, in the final variation in the time-reduced game state, the limited frequency table 1 or the main game table 3 is configured to be referred to, but the final variation in the time-reduced game state is the probability variation game state and the non-probability variation game. The effect contents in the final fluctuation may be made different from that in the state, that is, the effect contents in the final fluctuation may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game. Good. For example, when referring to the limited frequency table 1 which is a symbol variation for a relatively long period of time, it is fueled whether or not the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state are ended or a big hit is caused by the symbol variation. You may execute the effect.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the changes from the second embodiment are step 1611 (second variation 1), steps 1635-1 (second variation 1) and 1635-2 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1608 After setting the special game start display instruction command to the side, or when the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executing. It is determined whether or not the round to be executed is the distribution game execution round (the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, the second R and the fourth R). If Yes in step 1611 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1850 (second), and if No, the process proceeds to step 1612.

If it is the final round in the special game in step 1634, in step 1635-1 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M, the end demo execution permission flag (by turning on, the special game end demo The flag indicating that the time is to be started) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to step 1635-2 (second variation 1). Next, in step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the end demo execution permission flag is on. If Yes at step 1635-2 (second variation 1), the procedure proceeds to step 1800 (variation 1), and if No, the procedure proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1997).

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the end demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (variant 1) of FIG. 32 (variant 1) in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is step 1803 (second variation 1), that is, if the end demo execution flag is off in step 1802, step 1803 (second variation 1) The CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22 in the special game. If Yes in step 1803 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1806, and if No, the process moves to step 1808. Thus, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the special game end demonstration time, which is the period after the end of the final round of the special game, is the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. The time value differs depending on whether or not there is a sphere. The condition that the special game end demo time is different is not limited to this. For example, it may be different depending on the game state at the time of the big hit. Specifically, (1) it varies depending on whether it is a probability variation game state or a non-probability variation game state, (2) it differs depending on whether it is a time reduction game state or a non-time reduction game state, ( 3) Probability variation game state and time shortening game state, probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, (4) Probability variation game state and time reduction game state, probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and The non-time-reduced gaming state may be configured to be different in some combinations of.

In addition, in this example, regarding a special game relating to a certain big hit symbol, (1) a special game when a special game is won in a non-time reduction game state, and there is a ball entering a specific area C22 during the special game. The game end demo time is the first period (10 seconds), (2) Special game end demo time when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state and there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the special game. Is the second period (3 seconds), (3) time shortened special game in the game state, the special game end demo time when there is a ball into the specific area C22 during the special game is the second period ( (1 second), (4) Special game end demo time when the special game is won in the time shortening game state and there is no entry to the specific area C22 during the special game, the third period (3 seconds) Thus, it may be configured such that “second period<third period<first period”. It should be noted that such a configuration is preferably applied to a special game won in the non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state or the probability variation game state and time reduction game state. As a specific example of the effect executed during the special game end demo time, in the first period, the effect of notifying that the player will shift to the probability variation game state, forgetting to take out the IC card used for renting game balls Related to the attention of, the effect of displaying the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer is executed, and in the third period, the effect of notifying that the game state will shift to the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state An effect related to calling attention is executed, and in the second period, an effect that notifies that the probability variation game state (long-term resort state) will continue is executed. In this way, the effect to be executed may be different depending on the length of the special game end demo time. Also, comparing the length of the special game end demo time by situation, the special game end demo time when the non-probability fluctuation game state before the special game starts and the probability fluctuation game state after the special game ends (first hit) Is 10 seconds, after the special game is a non-stochastic variation, the special game end demo time when the game state and the time shortened game state are 3 seconds, the probability variation game state before the special game starts and the probability variation after the special game ends It may be configured such that the special game end demo time when the game state is entered (continuation of a continuous holiday game) is 1 second, which is a time value relationship.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 19 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2480 (second variation 1) to step 2484 (second variation 1). That is, after turning off the special game in step 2430, in step 2480 (second variation 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S, the special game end command is a long open command (end demonstration set in step 1810 It is a command related to time information and is a command related to the fact that the end demo time is a long time of 10 seconds). If Yes in step 2480 (second variation 1), in step 2482 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S informs that the continuous game continuation image (after the special game ends, shifts to the probability variation game state) For example, a command to display “Congratulations! Still continuing!” for a long time (10 seconds in this example) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2480 (second change 1), that is, if the special game end command is a short opening command, in step 2484 (second change 1), the condominium end image (probability after completion of special game This is an effect for notifying that the game does not enter the variable gaming state. For example, a command for displaying "Matane!" for a short time (3 seconds in this example) is set, and the next process (step 2900). Process). The special game end demonstration time is long (10 seconds) and the short time (3 seconds). Shortening the time after the special game ends when the game end demo time is long (10 seconds) and the special mode when the special game end demo time is short (3 seconds) It is configured to be the same as the production mode (production tendency) in the time-reduced game state after the end of the game.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, the special game end demo time is provided after the final round of the special game is finished, and is specified by the special game being executed. By configuring the period of the special game end demo time to differ depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the area C22, it is highly profitable for the player when entering the specific area C22. While performing an effect that celebrates the player of the time, if the player does not enter the specific area C22, it is not a high profit for the player, so that the player returns to the normal game after performing an effect for a short time. It can be a game machine with more intonation.

In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, a special game start demonstration time may be provided. In the special game start demo time, it is not decided whether or not the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special game, so the special game start demo time depends on whether or not the special area C22 enters the ball. The periods will not be different. However, the special game start demo time may be different depending on the game state when the special game is won, for example, 10 seconds (right to the player when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state). For a relatively long time to execute the effect of promoting hitting, 3 seconds when the special game is won in the non-time shortened game state (relative to not execute the effect of prompting the player to execute right hitting) It may be configured to be a short time).

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In addition, in the second embodiment and the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine that shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game is finished by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. Although illustrated, such a configuration is not limited to only the configuration of the second embodiment and the first modification from the second embodiment. Therefore, the configuration having the specific region C22 different from the second embodiment and the modification 1 from the second embodiment is referred to as a modification 2 from the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the second embodiment will be described in detail below. I will describe.

First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 6 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1609-1 (second variation 2) and step 3100 (second variation 2), that is, in step 1608, a special game start display instruction command to the sub side is issued. After setting, in step 1609-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration execution permission flag, and proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). On the other hand, if Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 3100 (second variation 2). Next, in step 3100 (second variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a start demo time control process described later, and proceeds to step 1610.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 36 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1851-1 (second variation 2), step 1899-1 (second variation 2) to step 1899-7 (second variation 2), that is, step In 1851-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution demonstration time flag is off. If Yes in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1852, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1854. In addition, after setting the long open pattern in step 1856, or in step 1858 after setting the short open pattern, in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is It is determined whether or not the first main game symbol (first main game jackpot symbol). In the case of Yes in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in step 1899-2 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the distribution start demo timer for a long time {step 1899-3 (second variation). It is a time value that is longer than the time value set in variable 2). In this example, 10 seconds} are set and started, and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second variable 2). On the other hand, if No in step 1899-1 (second variation 2), in other words, if the stop symbol is the second main game symbol (second main game jackpot symbol), step 1899-3 (second variation 2) ), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a time value that is shorter than the time value set in the distribution start demo timer in a short time {step 1899-2 (second variation 2), and in this example, 3 Second} is set to start and the process proceeds to step 1899-4 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-4 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command related to the determined distribution start demo time information (a command to the sub side, which is a special game being executed). Set the command related to the time value of minute demo time). next,
In step 1899-5 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the flag during the distribution demo time (the flag for starting the distribution demo time when turned on), and the step 1899-6. Transition to (second variation 2). Even if No in step 1851-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1899-6 (second variation 2). Next, in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the distribution start demo timer is 0. If Yes in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), in step 1899-7 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during the distribution demonstration time, and proceeds to step 1860. .. If No in step 1899-6 (second variation 2), the process moves to the next process (process of step 1634). Thus, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the distribution start demonstration time, which is the start demo time of the distribution game execution round, is second when the jackpot on the first main game side is the big hit. It takes longer than the big game on the main game side.

Next, FIG. 49 is a configuration diagram of an example of a special winning opening opening pattern. Big hit symbols in the second embodiment, the first main game jackpot symbol is "4A, 5A, 7A" three types, the second main game jackpot symbol is "4B, 5B, 7B" three types of jackpot in total It has a design, and the open pattern in one round is only two types of "short open = 500 ms open → closed" and "long open = 30000 ms open → closed". The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening C10 or the second special winning opening C20) is not limited to this, and the number of types may be increased, or a plurality of openings may be made in one round. An open pattern (for example, “10000 ms open→10000 ms closed→10000 ms open→close”) may be used. Here, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is long open only in all rounds (16R) only for the second main game length open big hit, "5B/7B". .. Further, the distribution game execution round in which the second special winning opening C20 is opened is the fourth round, and in the other rounds, the first special winning opening is opened. Also, in all jackpots, the number of rounds executed is four or more, and the distribution game execution round is configured to be executed without fail. In this way, the first main game length open big hit "5A/7A" there is a short open round (2R), while the second main game length open big hit "5B/7B" There is no short-opening round, that is, the number of short-opening rounds is configured such that the number of first main game length open big hits is larger than that of the second main game length open big hits.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the start demo time control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 (second variation 2) of FIG. 47 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the start demonstration in progress flag is off. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the start demo time (3 seconds in this example) to the start demo time timer and starts. Next, in step 3016, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the second main game big hit symbol (3B, 5B, and 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M, as the special game start display instruction command to the sub side, the second long opening command (the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol is started. Command relating to the effect) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the first main game length open big hit symbol (5A and 7A in this example). To do. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M, as the special game start display instruction command to the sub side, the first long opening command (the second big winning opening of the first main game jackpot symbol). A command relating to the start of the special game in which C20 is opened long) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3110, in other words, if the big hit symbol in the stop is not the first main game long open big hit symbol, that is, if the first main game short open symbol (2A in this example) , In step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M, as a special game start display instruction command to the sub side, the first short opening command (the second big winning opening C20 of the first main game jackpot symbol is short opening) A command relating to the start of the special game) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3116.

Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the determined start demo time information to the sub side. Next, in step 3118, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the start demonstration in progress flag, and proceeds to step 3120. Even if No in step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. If Yes in step 3120, in step 3122, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration in progress flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the start demonstration execution permission flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the special game execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1610). On the other hand, if No in step 3120, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1610).

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 19 in the second modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2403-1 (second variation 2) to step 2403-11 (second variation 2) and step 2350 (second variation 2), that is, special game in step 2402. After turning off the middle flag, in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the start demonstration middle flag (when turned on, the special game start demonstration time is started. Flag) is off. If Yes in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2404. Next, in the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2403-2 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to the start demo display timer and sets the timer. To start. Next, in step 2403-3 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the start demonstration flag. Next, in step 2350 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start demonstration effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2). Even if No in step 2403-1 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-4 (second variation 2).

Next, in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the start demo time timer is 0. If Yes in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), in step 2403-5 (second variation 2), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the start demonstration flag and moves to step 2412. On the other hand, if No in step 2403-4 (second variation 2), the process moves to the next process (process in step 2900).

Further, after setting the command related to the big hit start display in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the command related to the distribution start demo time information from the main side in step 2403-6 (second variation 2). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the distribution start demonstration time is long (10 seconds in this example). ) Is determined. In the second modification from the second embodiment, the distribution start demo time, that is, the time value of the start demo time of the distribution game execution round, has two types, a long time and a short time. In the case of Yes in step 2403-7 (second variation 2), in step 2403-8 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not easily enter the ball at the distribution start demonstration time which is long. The notification effect (the effect that does not definitely notify the player whether or not the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long in the distribution game execution round) is executed, and step 2403-10 (second variation 2) is executed. Transition. On the other hand, Step 2403-7 (second
If No in Modification 2), in Step 2403-9 (Second Modification 2), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S makes it easy to enter a ball during the distribution start demonstration time which is a short time (distribution game execution round). At, an effect for definitely informing the player that the second special winning opening C20 is to be opened is executed), and the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). Even if No in step 2403-6 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2403-10 (second variation 2). Thus, in the second modification from the second embodiment, in the distribution game execution round related to the first main game symbol, the entry easy unreported effect is executed, and the distribution game related to the second main game symbol. In the execution round, it is configured to execute the easy entry notification effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to make a difference in which one of the easy-to-enter ball notification effect and the easy-to-enter ball notification effect is executed depending on the game state. For example, in the distribution game execution round related to the long open big jackpot (5A, 7A) on the first main game side that is won in the non-time-reduced game state and the non-probability variation game state, the unentered ball entry easy notification effect is executed, In the time reduction game state and the probability variation game state, the second main game side long open big jackpot (3B, 5B, 7B) in the distribution game execution round relating to the play game execution round is configured to be executed. Good. Further, the ending effect as described above in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed, and in such a case, during the special game execution in which the ending effect is executed, it is not easy to notify the entry. It is preferable that the effect and the easy entry notification effect are displayed so as not to be noticeable to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to focus more attention on the ending effect that is difficult to achieve. Similarly, it is configured to be able to execute a hold-in-long-village effect that informs the player that there is a big-holding hold in the hold that is being executed in the special game, and Even if it is executed, it may be configured to display the in-entering-not-yet-notified effect and the easy-entry-informing effect so as not to be noticeable to the player.

Next, in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether the special game being executed is the special game related to the second main game length open big hit symbol ( The second main game length open jackpot design is 3B, 5B and 7B). If Yes in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), the process moves to step 2416. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2403-10 (second variation 2), in step 2403-11 (second variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number (short opening). In the case of a big hit in which there are rounds, the number of rounds is not notified), and the process proceeds to step 2426. Thus, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, the first main winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is a big hit pattern that is a long open in all rounds, the second main game length open big hit pattern In the jackpot according to the above, while notifying the round being executed at the time of executing each round (notifying how many rounds are currently being executed), in any round, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning In the big hit with the mouth C20 being short open (or in the big hit having the round with the first big winning opening C10 being short open), the round being executed is not notified at the time of executing each round. When the round being executed is not notified, instead of displaying the notification of the round, an object image (for example, a treasure box, etc.) corresponding to the number of rounds (a treasure box, etc.) is displayed as the first special winning opening C10 or the second. It may be configured to additionally display each time a round in which the special winning opening C20 is opened long is executed. In addition, a plurality of object images are displayed at the start of the special game (or immediately after the start of the special game), and an effect is executed to ensure that the number of rounds corresponding to the number of the object images is long open. You may. It should be noted that, at the time of executing a special game in which all rounds are long open, the effect may or may not be executed, but if it is not executed, the number of currently executed rounds is displayed. Is desirable. Incidentally, in a jackpot in which the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20 is a short opening in any round (or in a big hit having a round in which the first big winning opening C10 is a short opening), It may be configured to notify only the number of rounds in which the first special winning opening C10 or the second special winning opening C20 is long open (for example, “1R=long open, 2R=short open, 3R=long”). In the case of "open", the third round informs that it is the second round, etc.). Incidentally, the effect to be executed during the execution of the special game is not limited to this, for example, a big hit in the pending in a predetermined round (or the distribution game execution round) after the distribution game execution round during the execution of the special game In the case where there is a hold that becomes, it may be configured to be able to execute an intra-holding condominium effect that notifies that it is definite that a big hit will be decided. Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, the game state after the end of the special game has not been determined when the in-hold holiday game effect is executed in the round before the distribution game execution round (to the specific area C22). Since it has not been decided whether or not the player will enter the ball), there is a possibility that the symbol fluctuation related to the held subject to the notification will be lost even though it has been notified that it will be a big hit. It is preferable that the execution timing of the sol production is after entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round, or after finishing the distribution game execution round. Further, the distribution game execution round may be any round, and for example, the first round may be configured as the distribution game execution round (also applicable to the case where there is one special winning opening). ..

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the start demonstration effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 2) of FIG. 51 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not to receive the second long open command from the main side. If Yes in step 2352, the process moves to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to receive the first length open command from the main side. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S informs that the final effect execution lottery for winning 1/5 (the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long in the special game being executed). Or not) is executed. Next, in step 2358, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the finalized effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2358, the process moves to step 2360. Next, in step 2360, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a long open confirmation notification effect (an effect of informing that the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long in the special game in progress) as a start demonstration effect. Then, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 2354 (when the first short opening command is received from the main side) or in the case of No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the long opening is present as the start demonstration effect. Notification effect (effect not informing whether the second special winning opening C20 is long open or short open in the special game being executed) is executed, and the following process {process of step 2403-4 (second variation 2)} is executed. Move to. Even in the special game start demo time when the start demonstration effect is executed, as in the distribution start demo time, 10 seconds for the big hit on the first main game side (a high proportion of them) and the second main game. The side jackpot (higher percentage thereof) may be configured to take 3 seconds.

With the above configuration, in the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, in the special game related to the second main game side, the second special winning opening in the distribution game execution round in all the special games C20 is long open, in the special game related to the first main game side, in the distribution game execution round, the second special winning opening C20 is provided with a special game long open and a special game short open. In the special game on the second main game side, the fact that the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long at the start demonstration time of the special game is notified, while on the special game on the first main game side, the second big winning Even if it is a special game in which the mouth C20 is open for a long time, it is configured to have a case where the second special winning opening C20 is notified and a case where it is not notified at the start demonstration time of the special game. In the special game on the side of the second main game that is sure to enter the specific area C22, the player is informed that the second special winning opening C20 will be opened long, while entering the specific area C22 during the special game. In the special game on the side of the first main game, which is not definite to do, the player basically performs the effect of inspiring whether or not the second special winning opening C20 is to be opened for a long time, but also in the case of definite notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine that can execute an effect corresponding to the ease of entering the specific area C22.

In the modified example 2 from the second embodiment, the easy entry notification effect and the easy entry unreported effect are configured to be executed at the distribution start demonstration time, but before the distribution game execution round. It may be executed during execution of the round to be executed (may be executed over a plurality of rounds), or may be executed during execution of the distribution game execution round.

(Third Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, a game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, so that the probability variation game state is entered after the special game is finished. The playability that gives a high profit to the player by entering the ball is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration having such a game property will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

First, FIG. 53 is a drawing showing the basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

First, in the third embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and the existence of the first main game starting opening A10 causes the second main game to start. The upper part of the game starting port B10 is closed. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the second main game starting openings B10. A game ball that is guided to the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, and flows down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured so as not to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are the first main game start openings A10. It may be configured to be guided to.

Further, while the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10, and thus the game area D30 While the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, even if each starting opening is arranged so as to be easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. Good. It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

Here, in the third embodiment, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), which is easily guided, and flows down the left side of the game area D30. Is configured to be difficult to guide (however, not limited to this, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. (For example, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 may be provided on each of the left side and the right side of the game area D30)}.

Next, in the upper right of the outlet D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged. Before reaching the outlet D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged.

Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the mouth D36 and on the upper right of the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and the second special winning Mouth solenoid C26), start driving at the time of the small hitting game start, and an upper shielding member C24 that can prevent the flow down to the lower shielding member C25 of the game ball, and start driving when the power of the game machine is turned on, The lower shield member C25 that can prevent the flow down to the V winning opening C27, the V winning opening C27 that is the winning opening that triggers the transition to the special game by entering the ball during the small hit game, and the V winning opening C27 V winning hole entrance detecting device C27s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, the second big winning hole discharge port C23 for discharging the game ball entering the second big winning hole C20, and the second big It is provided with a second special winning opening discharge detecting device C23s for detecting the entry of a game ball into the winning opening outlet C23. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s. Next, in the second special winning opening electric part C21d, the second special winning opening C20 is placed in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win in the second special winning opening C20 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Change. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and can be changed between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected to the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, It may be a tongue-type attacker, and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10). The internal structure of the second special winning opening C20 will be described later.

Next, FIG. 54 is an operation diagram relating to the second special winning opening C20 in the third embodiment, and more specifically, an upper shielding member C24 and a lower shielding provided in the second special winning opening C20. It is an operation view concerning whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 based on the opening and closing of the member C25. In addition, in the third embodiment, if the game ball is continuously fired toward the second special winning opening C20 during the small hitting game execution (if the player continues to hit right), the second big winning opening C20 is reached. The game balls are configured to enter a plurality of balls (for example, the opening mode of the second special winning opening C20 (the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d) is "0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 1 second open→1 second closed→1 second open→close”. Therefore, whether the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 is determined by the game ball inside the second big winning opening C20 being the upper shielding member C24. It is determined by whether or not the opening timing with the lower shielding member C25 matches well. Hereinafter, the action of the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening C20 during the small hit game will be described in detail.

First, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the second special winning opening C20 is inserted into the second special winning opening C20 (as a flow path for a game ball inside the second special winning opening C20). The second big winning opening winning detection device C21s that detects a ball, the V winning opening C27, the V winning opening winning detecting device C22s that detects a ball entering the V winning opening C27, and the V winning opening C27 is not entered. And a second special winning opening discharge detecting device C23s that detects a ball entering the second special winning opening discharging port C23, which is a discharge flow path for the game balls. It is provided with a lower shield member C25 provided above the V winning opening C27 and an upper shield member C24 provided above the lower shield member C25, and the upper shield member C24 and the lower shield member C25 from the game board ( A closed state that can or can easily obstruct the fall of the game ball by being in a protruding state (toward the player's side) (advancing state), and withdrawing into the game board (back side from the player's side) It is configured to be able to take the open state in which it is impossible or difficult to obstruct the fall of the game ball (it is possible to drop the game ball) by being in the state (retraction state) (like a so-called Vero type attacker Is a configuration). More specifically, in the present embodiment, when the upper shield member C24 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or is difficult to reach the lower shield member C25, and when the upper shield member C24 is in the open state. The game ball can reach or easily reach the lower shield member C25, and when the lower shield member C25 is in the closed state, the game ball cannot reach or difficult to reach the V winning opening C27. When C25 is in the open state, the game ball is configured to reach or easily reach the V winning opening C27. Next, a specific flow path of the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening C20 during the execution of the small hit game will be described.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the game ball that entered the second special winning opening C20 during the small hitting game is in the closed state after passing through the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s, and is in an upper shielding state. It is guided to the member C24 and stays in the area (referred to as a stopping area) formed by the upper shield member C24 and the inner wall surface of the second special winning opening C20 (placed on the upper shield member C24). In this embodiment, since only one game ball can be placed in the stop area, a certain game ball is placed in the stop area as shown in FIG. 54(a). In this case, the game ball guided inside the second special winning opening C20 after the mounting timing of the certain game ball collides with the certain game ball mounted on the upper shielding member C24. And reaches the second special winning opening discharge detecting device C23s and the second special winning opening discharge C23 without passing through the upper shielding member C24 (it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the V winning opening C27). It is configured so that it is guided to the flow path (the stop area is configured so that the certain game ball is not pulled out of the stop area due to the impact when the other game ball collides. Has been). Here, the right part of FIG. 54(a) is a cross-sectional view schematically showing the XX cross section in FIG. 54(a). As shown in the cross-sectional view, in FIG. 54(a), the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are both in a closed state (a state in which the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 protrude from the game board (toward the player's side) (the sectional view). It is understood that the game ball can be placed on the upper shielding member C24 in this case).

In addition, in the third embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 is set to be opened after a certain period of time from the start of the small hit game (in this example, 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game), and the lower shield member. C25 is configured to repeat the transition between the closed state and the open state at a constant cycle (4 seconds cycle in this example) after the power is turned on (the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 is periodic) Whether or not the ball can enter the V winning opening C27 is mainly determined by the timing when the upper shielding member C24 is opened (in other words, the timing of starting the small hit game) (the lower shielding member C25 is When the small hitting game where the timing of the open state and the timing of the upper shielding member C24 are substantially coincident is started, the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27).

The third embodiment is merely an example, and the upper shielding member C24 and the lower shielding member C25 are in a state in which the fall of the game ball cannot be impeded or difficult to inhibit, and a state in which the fall of the game ball can be impeded or easily impeded. , May have any structure as long as they can be transited, and other configurations are not limited at all.

In addition, in the third embodiment, two shield members, an upper shield member C24 and a lower shield member C25, which prevent the game balls from entering the V winning opening C27 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The shielding member may be configured to prevent the game ball from entering the V winning opening C27. Further, even in the gaming machine shown in the second embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, the game machine shifts to the probability variation game state after the special game ends, the specific area. You may comprise so that the shielding member which inhibits the entry of the game ball into C22 may be provided. In such a configuration, the opening mode of the shielding member may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot pattern that triggered the jackpot, and in such a case, (1) the shielding in the distribution game execution round As an opening mode of the member, the shielding member is changed from the closed state to the open state at 50 ms after the distribution game execution round start timing or at the distribution game execution round start timing regardless of the jackpot pattern, (2) distribution game execution round The shield member changes from the open state to the closed state at a timing of 200 ms after the end timing (depending on the jackpot pattern, it may be after 200 ms or after 3000 ms). By this, there is a timing that the shielding member opens regardless of the big hit pattern, the distribution game execution round is finished more than the period from when the distribution game execution round is started to when the shielding member is first opened. It can be configured such that the period from when the shielding member is closed to the last is longer.

Next, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the third embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1700 (third), step 1750 (third), step 3450 (third), and step 1950 (third). That is, in step 1600, after executing the special game control process, in step 1700 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1750 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an upper shielding member drive control process described later. Next, in step 3450 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a lower shield member drive control process described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a later-described V winning opening entry determination process, and proceeds to step 1997.

Next, FIG. 56 shows the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart. Differences from the present embodiment are steps 1403 (third), 1410-3 (third), step 1434 (third) and step 1436 (third), that is, step 1403 (third), The CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied (in the third embodiment, the fact that the small hit game is not being executed is added as the fluctuation start condition). If Yes in step 1403 (third), the process proceeds to step 1405, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1419. Further, after determining the stop symbol for the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1410-3 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the main game side random number, the result of the lottery, the game state, The variation mode (or variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

When the stop symbol is not the big hit symbol in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1434 (third) whether or not the stop symbol is the small hit symbol. If Yes in step 1434 (third), in step 1436 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1434 (third), the process proceeds to step 1500.

Next, FIG. 57 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) is an example of the first main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game win/loss lottery table MN11ta-B) in the third embodiment. Is. In the third embodiment, regardless of the game state, the table contents to be referred to are configured to be different only depending on whether it is a symbol variation related to the first main game side or a symbol variation related to the second main game side. There is. Further, the first main game side and the second main game side are configured to be able to win a small hit, and the winning/winning lottery result on the second main game side is almost a small win (with a probability of 1020/1024). The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, when winning the small hit, the first main game side is one type, the second main game side is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as the small hit symbol from the two types of main game symbol candidates. ing. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the state (limited frequency state) in which the type and/or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed It may be configured to migrate}.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) in FIG. 18 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1681-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the special game triggered by the entrance into the V winning opening C27 (in the third embodiment, a small hit). The special game is executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the game). If Yes in step 1681-1, in step 1681-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol is a short-time big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that shifts to the time shortening game state after the execution of the special game, Then, it is determined whether or not it is 4B/5A/5B/7A/7B). If Yes in step 1681-2, the process proceeds to step 1681-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1681-1, in step 1681-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a time saving small hit symbol (after the completion of execution of the special game, the special game will be moved to the time reduction game state. It is a small hit symbol that becomes a transition trigger to, and in the present example, it is determined whether or not after the special game triggered by 7AK/7BK). If Yes in step 1681-4, the process proceeds to step 1681-5.

Next, in step 1681-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (100 times in this example). Next, in steps 1681-6 and 1681-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag, and shifts to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. To do. In addition, in the case of No in step 1681-2, in other words, when the stop symbol is 4A which is a time saving big hit symbol, or in the case of No in step 1681-4, in other words, it is triggered by 2BK which is a time saving small hit symbol. Even when it is after the end of the special game, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. Note that the processing related to the limited frequency (subroutines of step 1411, step 1450, step 1413, step 1431) is deleted.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge waiting flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722 to be described later, that is, a scheduled small hit game (especially the scheduled second big Whether the flag that is turned on during the waiting period for discharging the game balls remaining in the second special winning opening C20 (discharging standby time)} is off after the execution of the opening pattern of the winning opening C20) is finished. To judge. If Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all the small hit symbols, "0.2 seconds open → 0. 8 seconds closed→1 second opened→1 second closed→1 second opened→closed”, and if the game ball continues to be fired toward the second big winning opening C20, the game ball will go to the second big winning opening C20. Configured to enter multiple balls). Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a small hit execution start command (a command to the effect that the small hit game has been started, and launches a game ball toward the second special winning opening C20 to the player. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 and starts the small hitting game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1712. In the third embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, so that the discharge is started after a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) from the start of the small hit. The waiting time is configured to end (of course, the method for measuring the discharge waiting time is not limited to this, and for example, a scheduled small hit game (particularly, a scheduled second big winning opening C20 The measurement may be started after the execution of the release pattern).

On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process moves to step 1712.

Next, in step 1712, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball winning (ball winning) in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1712, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1714, the process moves to step 1718. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1712 or step 1714, in step 1716, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the small hit game timer MP41t and a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) for opening the special winning opening has elapsed. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1716, the process moves to step 1718.

Next, in step 1718, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops the driving of the second winning a prize electric prize C21d and closes the second winning a prize port C20. Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge standby flag (the discharge standby time is started from the timing of execution of this processing), and the process proceeds to step 1724. Even if No in step 1701, the process moves to step 1724.

Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (10 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 1724, in step 1725, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the ejection standby flag. Next, in step 1728, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}. Even if No in step 1710, step 1716, or step 1724, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1750 (third)}.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the upper shielding member drive control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses a predetermined drive pattern (in this example, a pattern of repeating “close for 5 seconds→open for 1 second→close for 24 seconds”) the upper shielding member. The driving of C24 is started, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1800). It should be noted that there is no problem if the drive pattern of the upper shielding member C24 is changed, but in this example, the game ball is V winning only when the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 match. Since it is configured to be able to enter the mouth C27, it is impossible to enter the V winning opening C27 because the opening time is set to a long time such as 3 seconds or the driving is not opened for 10 seconds or more. It is desirable not to configure. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in step 1756, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the upper shielding member C24 to the closed state (initial position) to end the driving, and performs the next process {step 3450 (third) Processing}. As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving upon the start of the small hit game (the opening of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit), and the end of the small hit game. Is configured to end the drive, the small hitting game is completed before the drive is performed once in the opening pattern of the upper shielding member C24, and the driving of the upper shielding member C24 is configured to be completed. .. Since the small hit game is provided with a discharge waiting time, even after the opening of the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit game is finished, the small hit game is not finished until the discharge waiting time is finished. It will be.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the lower shield member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3450 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3452, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the lower shielding member C25 in a constant drive pattern (in this example, a pattern of “closing for 3 seconds→opening for 1 second” is repeated) after power-on. , To the next process {process of step 1950 (third)}. In this way, the upper shielding member C24 starts driving when the small hit game starts, while the lower shielding member C25 starts driving when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) in FIG. 55 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the discharge standby time. In this case, it is determined whether the flag that is turned on) is off. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27. If Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPU MC of the main control board M is within the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small hit game). Determine whether there is. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect, which will be described later) to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation reservation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M has the V winning opening effective period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small hit game). It is determined whether or not is completed. If Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1997). Further, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of illegal ball entry such as game ball entry into the V winning opening C27 increases even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately executed. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game related to entering the V winning opening C27 is "15R", and the series of the sequence of "small hit game → special game related to entering the V winning opening C27" is summed up. Then, the round number "1R" relating to the small hit game and the round number "15R" relating to the special game are "16R".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, a control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 63 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 11A is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The changes from the present embodiment are step 2001 (third) and step 2003 (third). That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2001 (third), the CPU SC of the sub control board S resets and starts the power on timer SM24t. The power-on timer SM24t is provided for grasping the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, C of the sub-control board S
The PUSC executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, when RAM clear information is received → when sub-side RAM is initialized and various information commands are received). → Reset the production related information at the time of power failure in the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2003 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the number of reservations (for example, the drawing reservation counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). In addition, the effect under execution, the information related to the special symbol, etc. are not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. After that, the process shifts to a loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetitive process routine of the CPUSC of the sub control board S. The changes from this embodiment are step 2500 (third) and step 2550 (third). That is, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described above. Next, in step 2500 (third), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a V winning detection effect display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400. After executing the special game-related display control process in step 2400, in step 2550 (third), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the small hit game-related display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2900. .. The stay stage determination process of step 2050 is deleted.

Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 (third) in FIG. 63 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit execution start command (a command relating to the fact that the small hit game has started) is received from the main side. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prompts right hitting instruction effect {launch of a game ball (execute right hitting) toward the second big winning opening C20 during a small hit game). The command related to the effect} is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2506. On the other hand, if No in step 2502, the process moves to step 2506. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the CPUSC of the sub-control board S to notify the player that the game ball has entered the V winning detection command (V winning opening C27) from the main side. It is determined whether or not a command for executing the V winning detection effect, which is the effect of (3) is received. If Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the V winning detection effect (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). , And shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2506, the procedure moves to the next step (step 2400). Since the V winning detection effect is an effect that informs the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 and a special game will be executed thereafter, the effect content is an effect that celebrates the player. It is desirable that the contents or the contents of an effect that informs the player that it is highly profitable, for example, an effect of displaying "V" on the effect display device SG in the full display area SG10.

Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the small hit game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (third) in FIG. 63 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the small hit medium flag is off. If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit start display (transmitted to the sub sub control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). ..

Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S turns on the small hit medium flag, and proceeds to step 2564. Even if No in step 2552, the process proceeds to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2564,
In step 2566, the CPU SC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the small hit end display (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the small hitting flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2900). Even if No in step 2554 or step 2564, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Action)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the operation relating to the winning of the V winning opening C27 in the third embodiment will be described. First, in the same figure, when the holding related to the small hit occurs, it will be calculated based on the number of holdings at the time of determining the variation time. After the holding related to the small hit occurs, the upper shield member C24 is not opened. It is an action diagram which illustrated the relationship between the time until it is started (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the “upper shield member opening arrival time”) and the ease of entering the V winning opening C27. .. In addition, in this example, a case where a hold related to a small hit occurs during a certain symbol variation in which there are two hold related to a loss is illustrated. In addition, in the present example, the order of digesting the hold is the order of “first hold→second hold→third hold” (the third hold is a hold related to a small hit). In the following, the time from the occurrence of the 3rd hold (=holding related to the small hit) to the end of the changing pattern is the same (2 seconds), and the 1st hold of the pattern change starts. The timing and the random number values of the variation mode determination random numbers of the first to third retentions are the same (for example, the random number value of the variation mode determination random numbers of the first retention and the second retention is 799, and the variation mode determination random number of the third retention). Is 1023).

First, if there is a hold related to a small hit during the fluctuation of the pattern in which there are two hold related to the loss, the upper shield member opening arrival time, the third hold (= hold related to the small hit) occurs. From the time until the fluctuation of the symbol being changed is ended; the change time of the first hold; the change time of the second hold; the change time of the third hold (=hold related to the small hit); the small hit game start Is calculated as the total time from the time until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started;

Next, while referring to the table at the top of the figure, while there are two holdings related to the loss (first holding and second holding), the third holding (=holding related to the small hit) is Under the situation that occurred, as pattern A, when the shooting of the game ball is stopped after the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) has occurred (in particular, after the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) has occurred Is a case where a new hold does not occur}, and the pattern B is used as a pattern B when the game ball is continuously launched after the third hold (=hold related to a small hit) is generated {especially, the third When a new hold occurs after a hold (=hold related to a small hit) occurs} the upper shield member opening arrival time.

In pattern A, a new hold does not occur after the third hold (=hold related to a small hit) occurs, and the number of hold is 2 when the variable time related to the first hold is determined (the second hold and the second hold). 3 hold (=hold for small hits)}, and when the variable time for the second hold is determined, the number of holds is 1 {third hold (=hold for small hits)}, and the third hold (= The number of holdings is 0 when the variable time for holding a small hit is determined. In this case, referring to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table in FIG. 13, the time from the occurrence of the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) to the end of the changing pattern is 2 seconds. The variable time of the first hold is 5 seconds; the variable time of the second hold is 10 seconds; the variable time of the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) is 60 seconds; the small hit game The time from the start to the start of opening the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shield member opening arrival time is 82 seconds.

Next, in the pattern B, after the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) occurs, two new holds occur after the start of the symbol change of the first hold and before the start of the symbol change of the second hold. This is the case, and the number of holds is 2 when the variable time relating to the first hold is determined {the second hold and the third hold (=hold related to the small hit)}, and the number of hold when determining the variable time relating to the second hold. Are three {third hold (=hold related to small hit) and two newly created hold}, and the number of hold is 2 when the variable time for the third hold (=hold related to small hit) is determined. It becomes the number (the above-mentioned two newly generated holdings). In this case, referring to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table in FIG. 13, in the pattern B, from the occurrence of the third hold (=hold related to the small hit) until the changing of the symbol is finished. Is 2 seconds; the first holding time is 5 seconds; the second holding time is 5 seconds; the third holding time (=holding for small hits) is 60 seconds. Yes; the time from the start of the small hit game until the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is 5 seconds; therefore, the upper shielding member opening arrival time is 77 seconds.

Here, as described above, the easiness of entering the V winning opening C27 (whether or not a game ball can enter the V winning opening C27) depends on the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Is a good match. That is, by referring to the upper shield member opening arrival time and the opening timing of the lower shield member C25, whether or not it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 at the time of the small hit game according to the pattern A and the pattern B. It is possible to determine in advance.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the open state (closed state) of the upper shielding member C24 and the open state (closed state) of the lower shielding member C25 in each of the pattern A and the pattern B (the lower shielding member C25 is a power source). And the opening and closing are periodically repeated from the time of inputting). In this timing chart, the elapsed time from the third hold (=hold related to small hit) occurrence timing is illustrated with reference to the third hold (=hold related to small hit) occurrence timing. Further, as an open mode (close mode) of the lower shielding member C25, the elapsed time from the third hold (=hold related to small hit) occurrence timing is “4n+1 (seconds)” to “4n+2 (seconds)” (n Is an integer) and is open.

As shown in this timing chart, in the pattern A, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing at which 82 seconds have elapsed from the third holding (=holding related to the small hit) occurrence timing, If the time (0.2 seconds in this example) taken for the game ball to reach the lower shielding member C25 from the position of the upper shielding member C8 is taken into consideration, it becomes 82.2 seconds, and the 82.2 seconds is 4n+1 (seconds). To "4n+2 (seconds)" (n is an integer). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 do not match, and the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls by opening the upper shielding member C24. Since the lower shield member C25 is not opened when the lower shield member C25 is reached, it is difficult to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (the lower shield member C25 causes V The entry into the winning opening C27 is likely to be hindered). On the other hand, in the pattern B, the timing at which the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is started is the timing at which 77 seconds have elapsed from the third suspension (=retention related to the small hit) occurrence timing, and the game ball is the upper shielding member C24. 77.2 seconds when the time (0.2 seconds in this example) from the position of to reach the lower shielding member C25 is added, and the 77.2 seconds are “4n+1 (seconds)” to “4n+2 (seconds). (N is an integer) (n=19). Therefore, the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are matched, and the upper shielding member C24 is opened, so that the game ball placed on the upper shielding member C24 falls down. When the lower shield member C25 is opened when reaching the shield member C25, it becomes easy to enter the V winning opening C27 located downstream of the lower shield member C25 (depending on the lower shield member C25, a game ball). It is difficult to prevent the ball from entering the V winning opening C27). In the case of the pattern A and the pattern B, the above-described firing continuation instruction effect is executed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, as the pattern A, new hold does not occur until the symbol variation related to the small hit starts after the hold related to the small hit occurs (the number of hold is 2).
It is difficult to start the pattern variation in the state where there are more than the number of pieces=the time from the occurrence of the hold for the small hit to the start of the opening of the upper shielding member C24 tends to be long) and the pattern B is small. A new hold occurs from the occurrence of the hold related to the hit to the start of the symbol change related to the small hit (the pattern change is easily started while the state in which the number of hold is 2 or more is always maintained = The opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 may change depending on whether the time from the occurrence of the holding related to the small hit to the start of the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is short). Further, such a change in the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 can change whether or not the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are well matched. In the case of a small win, a highly entertaining gaming machine in which attention is paid to whether or not to enter the V winning opening C27 can be provided.

In addition, in the third embodiment, based on the variation mode determination random number of the hold that is present at the time when the hold related to the small hit occurs, all the change times that can be executed corresponding to the number of hold when the hold is exhausted are confirmed. Then, based on the result, the time from the occurrence of the holding for the small hit in advance to the opening of the upper shielding member C24 is calculated, and the calculated result and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are calculated. , (Additionally, the time required for the game ball to reach the lower shield member C25 from the position of the upper shield member C24 is added), it is easy to enter the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game. Predicting a desired change in the number of holdings (at which timing and how much holding is desirable) for the purpose of (the opening timing of the upper shielding member C24 and the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25 are matched) Is possible. With this configuration, and when the occurrence of the small-hit hold, if it is possible to enter the V winning opening C27 during the execution of the small-hit game related to the hold, the combination of the variation time that allows the ball entry The player may be informed as to how the game ball is fired (or the desired change in the number of holdings) as an effect, and by doing so, the game is played to the V winning opening C27 in the small hit game. It is possible to create a novel game property in which whether or not a ball enters can be determined by the technical intervention of the player.

In the third embodiment, the number of holdings when determining the variation time of the main game symbol is configured so that the determined variation time can be different, so that a small-hit withholding occurs. Although the time until the lower shield member C25 is opened can be changed to allow the technical intervention of the player, the time from the occurrence of a small hit holding until the lower shield member C25 is opened is set. The configuration that allows the player to make a difference depending on the technical intervention is not limited to this. For example, (1) when the player presses, the fluctuation of the main game symbol is forcibly stopped, and the stop symbol is displayed. A variable shortening button to be provided is provided, and the time is made different depending on the timing of pressing the button, (2) the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are simultaneously parallel. It is configured to be able to execute parallel lottery that can be drawn (and variable), and when the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol becomes a small hit symbol, a small hit related to the small hit symbol. The period during the game execution may be configured to temporarily stop the variable time (elapse of the variable time) of the first main game symbol, and the time may be different.

Incidentally, in the third embodiment, the small hitting pattern is stopped and the game ball is entered so that the small hitting game is started. , When a predetermined condition (for example, a specific small hit symbol is stopped, etc.) is satisfied, a game ball may be launched at such a timing that the game ball may enter the V winning opening C27 during execution of the small hit game. Can be executed (for example, "On the effect display device SG, display "If you enter the specific entrance now, you have a great chance to enter the V winning opening!", etc.)" can be executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the specific game state, there is a probability variation game state in which the winning/winning lottery result is advantageous to the player as compared with the non-probability variation game state, and the second big prize during the special game. It is configured to have a distribution game execution round which is a round in which the mouth C20 is opened, and by entering the V winning opening C27 during the distribution game execution round, the probability variation game state is transitioned after the special game is finished. It may be configured as described above (a so-called ball game, as exemplified in the second embodiment). Also, in such a case, in the round before the distribution game execution round, the game ball is fired at such a timing that the game ball can enter the V winning opening C27 in the distribution game execution round. It is desirable to be configured so as to be able to execute an effect to be notified to the person (for example, "On the effect display device SG, it is displayed such as "A big chance of a sudden change if you enter the second big winning opening now!!"). ..

(First modification from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the game property that the special game is executed by entering the game ball into the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game is illustrated, but such a configuration is the first. It is not limited to only three embodiments. Therefore, the configuration having the game property that the special game is executed by entering the game ball into the V winning opening C27 during the small hitting game different from the third embodiment is changed from the third embodiment. As an example 1, only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart showing a main game symbol display process in the first modification from the third embodiment. In step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)}, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to a subroutine, and the next process ( The process proceeds to step 1550). In addition, the gaming machine in the first modification from the third embodiment is configured so as to be in the order of digestion in the order of arrival (distances in which reservations occur are digested from the previous one).

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 67 in the first modification of the third embodiment. First, the change from the third embodiment is step 1405-1 (third variation 1), that is, if the variation start condition is satisfied in step 1403, step 1405-1 (third variation 1). Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads out the main game side random number relating to the earliest hold that has occurred (all hold of the first main game side and the second main game side) that are occurring. , And proceeds to step 1406.

Next, FIG. 69 is a main game table 3 according to a first modification from the third embodiment. In the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, in the time shortening game state, the average value of the fluctuation time relating to the hit on the first main game side is higher than the average value of the fluctuation time relating to the hit on the second main game side. It's been a long time. Further, in the time-reduced game state, the shortest variation time for hitting the first main game side is longer than the shortest variation time for hitting the second main game side. That is, in the time shortening game state, the average value of the variation time of the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the average value of the variation time of the small hit on the second main game side. Further, in the time reduction game state, the shortest variation time for the big hit on the first main game side is longer than the shortest variation time for the small hit on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing of step 1500 in FIG. 68 in the first modification of the third embodiment. The changes in Modification 1 of the third embodiment are Step 1530 (Third Modification 1) to Step 1542 (Third Modification 1), that is, after turning off the auxiliary game shortened flag in Step 1518, Step 1530 In the (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the second main game short time counter (the counter that is subtracted only when the symbol variation of the second main gaming symbol ends) to zero, and the step 1532 (third variation). Go to 1). Even if No in step 1510, the process proceeds to step 1532 (third variation 1).

Next, in step 1532 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the second main game short time counter is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1532 (second variation 1), in step 1534 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 (decrement in this example) from the second main game short working time counter value. .. Next, in step 1536 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game short working time counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1536 (third variation 1), in step 1538 (third variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1540 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1542 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time saving counter to zero, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550). On the other hand, if No in step 1532 (third variation 1) or step 1536 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Thus, in the modification 1 from the third embodiment, the time saving counter value is subtracted by the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the variation of the second main gaming symbol, and only the variation of the second main gaming symbol. The second main game short working time counter value is configured to be subtracted.

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are steps 1682-1 (third variation 1) to step 1682-4 (third variation 1), that is, in step 1681-1, the player is allowed to enter the V winning opening C27. If not after the special game triggered, in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol is a long-time short-hit big hit symbol , 4B, 5A, 5B, 7A and 7B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5, and in the case of No in step 1682-1 (third variation 1), in other words, the stop symbol is a short, short, big hit symbol ( In the case of 4A), in the case of 4A), the CPUMC of the main control board M wins the current non-time reduction game state. It is determined whether it is after the end of the special game. If Yes in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) as the time saving number counter value. Next, in step 1682-4 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number (10 times in this example) as the second main game short time counter value, and step 1681-6 Move to. In addition, in the case of No in step 1682-2 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1681-5. By configuring in this way, if you win the short-time short-time big hit symbol in the non-time reduction game state, the time reduction game state after the end of the special game is the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main The total number of variations of the game symbol is 30 times, or the number of variations of the second main game symbol is 10, or it is configured to end when either is satisfied. In addition, in the time shortened game state (including the time shortened game state after the special game related to the short time short big hit symbol), if the short time short big hit symbol is won, the time shortened game state is 100 times after the end of the special game. It becomes (the total of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol ends at 100 times).

By configuring as described above, when the short-time, short-sized and big hit symbol is won, the time-saving game state after the end of the special game is the number of times the first main game symbol changes and the number of times the second main game symbol changes. The total number of 30 times, or the number of times the second main game symbol changes 10 times, or by configuring to end when either is satisfied, the second main game side in the time saving game state In the game play such that the symbol fluctuation fluctuates 10 times, even if the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side is mistakenly executed, the second main game short working time counter does not subtract the second By configuring so that the game can be continued without losing the right to be changed 10 times by the symbol change on the main game side, a more user-friendly game machine can be provided.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the game performance is such that the special game is started by entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit, but the configuration of the gaming machine provided with the small hit is not limited to this. Not done. Therefore, a configuration having a small hit different from that of the third embodiment will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

First, FIG. 72 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is that there is only one big winning opening and the V winning opening C27, the upper shielding member C24, and the lower shielding member C25 are not provided. That is, the entrance determination process is not executed.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 72 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 1249 (fourth), that is, if the auxiliary game symbol is a winning symbol in step 1230, in step 1249 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M, Based on the winning symbol and the game state, the opening mode of the electric accessory is determined, a predetermined time is set in the opening timer, and the process proceeds to step 1234.

Next, FIG. 74 shows the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 10 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart. The difference from the third embodiment is 1410-3 (fourth), step 1500 (fourth) and step 3350 (fourth), that is, step 1410-2 after determining the stop symbol in step 1410-2. In 3 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M, the main game symbol win/loss result, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation mode lottery random number), game state The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the set limited frequency type, and the process proceeds to step 1414. Also, after turning on the condition device flag in step 1432, or after turning on the small hit flag in step 1436 (third), or in step 1434 (fourth), the stop symbol is not the small hit symbol (lose). If it is a symbol), in step 1500 (fourth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency end determination process, which will be described later, and moves to the next process (the process of step 1550).

Next, FIG. 75 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the fourth embodiment. is there. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning/non-drawing result of the main game symbol, the main game time saving flag state, and the limited frequency type that is set. Is configured to be. That is, when the winning/winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a big hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is likely to be determined, and when the main game time saving flag is ON (time saving game state), It is configured so that the variation mode in which the variation time is short can be easily determined. Further, as shown in the variation mode at the time of losing and at the time of small hit, when the second limited frequency is set (for example, after the special game related to the big hit symbol “7B” is finished), the 0th limited frequency, Compared with the case where the first limited frequency is set (for example, after the special game related to the big hit symbols other than the big hit symbol "7B" is finished), the variation mode for a relatively short time is selected. In particular, in the case of a small hit, there is a large difference in the fluctuation time between the second limited frequency and the first limited frequency, and the difference is the second limited frequency and the first limited frequency in the case of a loss. It is relatively larger than the difference in the fluctuation time (average value) between frequency and time. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of description, the table is not configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that the table may be configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls. Absent. Furthermore, in the time shortening game state (when the main game time saving flag is on), the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side may be configured to be a relatively long time {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be held by decreasing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. This is especially effective when the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}. Further, although the variation mode related to the small hit on the first main game side is configured to be only one type, the variation mode is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of variation modes may be provided (particularly, the game state and the set). It is preferable to configure so that different variation modes can be selected based on the limited frequency types that are set).

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1508, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1508, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. If Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time saving number) is 0. If Yes in step 1514, in steps 1516 and 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process {process 3350 (fourth) process}. To do. Even if No in step 1508, step 1510, or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 3350 (fourth)}.

Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c (a counter that manages the number of times the main game symbol has changed in the limited frequency state) is greater than zero. If Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c by 1. Next, in step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value (remaining limited frequency count) of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 0.

If Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently-set limited frequency type is the second limited frequency. If Yes in step 3358, in step 3360 the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 3362, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the first specified number of times (for example, 65535 times, but the first limited frequency is continued until the next big hit). Yes, it may be an extremely large value other than this, or may be ∞ times, etc.), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). As described above, when the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 70 times, which will be described later) has elapsed in the second limited frequency state, the state is changed to the first limited frequency state.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3358, that is, in the 0th limited frequency state (excluding the first limited frequency state because it is not realistic to end), a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 will be described later). If it is the number of times and is equal to the upper limit number of the time-reduced game state), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set limited frequency type in step 3364 (at approximately the same time, the time-reduced game state). Also ends), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Even if No in step 3352 or step 3356, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (fourth) in FIG. 17 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1653-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol (for example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1653-1, in step 1653.2, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag.

Next, in step 1653-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 7B). If Yes in step 1653-3, in step 1653-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores it in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second specific number of times (for example, 70 times) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11. In this example, the second limited frequency state (a state advantageous to the player) is set only when the special game related to the big hit on the second main game side is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. However, by configuring the second main game side more easily to the state advantageous to the player than the first main game side, the probability variation game state and/or the time-reduced game state allows the player It is possible to increase the excitement of the player by overlapping the advantageous state and the effect.

On the other hand, if No in step 1653-3, in step 1653-6, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stored in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is the first specified number of times (for example, 65535 times, but continues the first limited frequency until the next big hit). This is the purpose and may be an extremely large value other than this, or may be ∞ times, etc.), and the processing proceeds to step 1653-11.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1653-1, that is, when it is the end of the special game related to the non-probable variation big hit, in step 1653-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the value of the time saving counter MP52c by a predetermined number of times. (For example, 50 times). Next, in step 1653-9, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the 0th limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores it in the RAM area). Next, in step 1653-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the 0th specific number of times (for example, 50 times, which is the same value as the number of times saved) as the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1653-11. To do. That is, when the probability variation game state is entered, the first limited frequency or the second limitation frequency is set, and when the probability variation game state is not entered, the 0th limited frequency is set.

Next, in steps 1653-11 and 1653-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fourth embodiment. In this example, for convenience of explanation, an example in which a small hit regularly occurs at an average fluctuation interval (a small hit occurs once every about 11 fluctuations) is given. In addition, the interval of firing the game balls according to the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds per ball (100 balls per minute), and about 1.7 seconds during the opening of the big winning opening C10 related to the small hit game. Three game balls are supposed to enter the special winning opening C10.

First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the non-probability variation/non-time shortening game state, the difference between the number of game balls shot and the prize ball obtained by entering the first main game starting opening A10. As a result, the player's balls will gradually decrease.

Next, as shown in the section (b) of the same figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the player's possession is achieved by the payout of the prize ball by the entrance into the special winning opening C10. The sphere will increase. Here, triggered by the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A”, the probability variation/time reduction game state is set, and the first limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

Next, as shown in the section (c) of the figure, in the probability variation/time-reducing gaming state (first limited frequency), there is a chance of a small win with a probability of 97/1024 (=once every 11 variations). As a result, a prize ball is paid out by a ball entered into the special winning opening C10 related to the small hit, so that the player's possession ball increases (moderately increases as compared with the special game described above). Here, in the section (c), the symbol variation is executed 33 times in about 65 seconds (about 117 small balls are won by three small hits).

Next, as shown in the section (d) of the same figure, during the special game relating to the big hit symbol "7B", the prize ball is paid out by entering the special winning opening C10, so that the player has The sphere will increase. Here, triggered by the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol “7B”, the probability variation/time reduction game state is set, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

Next, as shown in the section (e) of the figure, in the probability variation/time-reducing game state (first limited frequency), there is a chance of a small win with a probability of 97/1024 (=about every 11 variations). As a result, a prize ball is paid out by a ball entered into the special winning opening C10 related to the small hit, so that the player's possession ball increases (moderately increases as compared with the special game described above). Here, in the section (e), the symbol variation is executed 33 times in about 23 seconds (about 117 small balls are won by three small hits). That is, compared to the first limited frequency, the number of prize balls obtained by a small hit (or its expected value) is the same during the same number of fluctuations, but the time to consume the same number of fluctuations is shorter. Therefore, the player can be made to look as if he/she is in a high profit state. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, the game balls that are shot in 65 seconds are about 108 balls, and the game balls that are shot in 23 seconds are about 38 balls. Therefore, the lower the ball entry rate into the second main game starting opening B10, the more the game balls shot within the time to consume the same number of fluctuations are lost, so the second limited frequency time is more than the first limited frequency time. It should be added that the profit rate actually increases for the player.

Next, FIG. 80 is a timing chart according to the transition of the game state in the fourth embodiment. First, in the non-probability variation/non-time shortening game state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol "5A", and the 8R special game is executed. ..

Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, with the special game relating to the big hit symbol "5A" being completed, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are set, and the first limited frequency is set. Incidentally, during the time shortening game state, basically the variation of the second main game symbol will be executed.

Next, at a timing of 3 in the figure, the small hit game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol "BK" (at the time of the small hit game, the probability variation). The game state and the time saving game state are not switched).

Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the special game of 16R is executed in response to the fact that the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol "7B". At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to uncertain variation (non-stochastic variation game state), and the variation time is switched to non-time saving (non-time shortening game state).

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, with the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7B” being completed, the probability change game state and the time shortening game state are entered, and the second limited frequency is set. It Here, the state in which the second limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as the second limited frequency state) continues for a maximum of 70 fluctuations, and the variation time of the main game symbol (variation time at the time of losing and small hits) ) Is a state in which the time is more likely to be shorter than the state in which the first limited frequency is set (which may be referred to as the first limited frequency state). In this example, it is assumed that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times (the special game is not executed) within the period of 5 to 6 in the figure.

Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the second limited frequency state ends and the first limited frequency state is shifted to when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times in the second limited frequency state.

Next, at the timing 7 in the figure, the 8R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol “4B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to uncertain variation (non-stochastic variation game state), and the variation time is switched to non-time saving (non-time shortening game state).

Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the special game related to the big hit symbol "4B" is finished, the game shifts to the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state, and the 0th limited frequency is set. (Hereafter, in this example, during the maximum 50 fluctuations, the time-reduced game state and the 0th limited frequency state will continue).

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, after the special game related to the specific jackpot pattern (in this example, "7B"), the main game symbol for a predetermined period of time. The change time (in this example, the change time of the loss change and the small hit change) is likely to be short (for example, the second limited frequency state). As a result, by increasing the variation efficiency of the second main game side, it is possible to shorten the occurrence interval of the small hit (and the small hit game), and even during the same probability fluctuation/time reduction game state, the player It is possible to create a new game property in which there is an advantageous state (or a state which seems to be advantageous to the player).

In the present embodiment, the state in which the second limited frequency is set is configured to end with 70 fluctuations, but the present invention is not limited to this and is configured to continue until the next big hit is won. Good.

Although not particularly shown in this example, the effect mode (type of effect system such as background effect or notice effect) may be changed depending on the set limited frequency type. As such a configuration, for example, when the second limited frequency is set (after the special game in which the shift to the second limited frequency is finished), the effect mode is the effect mode A (for example, the background image of the night is displayed. ), and if the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency is set (after the special game that is to shift to the 1st limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency), the effect mode is the effect mode B (for example, in the evening. The background image is displayed). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in a part of the symbol variation which is a big hit plan during the stay in the effect mode A, the effect of shifting from the effect mode A to the effect mode B during the symbol change (a background image at night) To an evening background image) may be performed. Further, in such a configuration, when the symbols are planned to be a big hit when the player stays in the production mode A, and when it is planned to shift to the second limited frequency again after the special game related to the big hit ends, It may be configured to increase the possibility of maintaining the stay in the rendering mode A. In other words, this configuration, in the case where an effect of shifting from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is executed, after the special game related to the symbol variation ends, the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency. Since the possibility of shifting to the game is increased and the situation may be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game depending on whether or not such an effect is executed. That is, when such a production mode transition is not performed with respect to the transition from the production mode B to the production mode A, when the production mode B is staying {(* not accompanied by the mode transition, from the beginning (after completion of the latest special game From)) When staying in staging mode B}, a case where a big hit occurs relatively relative to a case where a big hit occurs in staging mode B accompanied by mode transition In the case of such a configuration, the transition to the production mode B is suggested when the production mode A is staying, as the production to transition from the production mode A to the production mode B. It is also possible to execute an effect such as that described above, and then execute a specific reach effect, or to generate an effect similar to the specific reach effect at the time of staying in effect mode B.

In addition, although not particularly shown in this example, even if any limited frequency type is set, the total number of balls entered into the special winning opening C10 at the time of a small hit game is displayed or entered. The count display may be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of prize balls won during the period in which the second limited frequency is set (especially during the period in which the second limited frequency→special game→the second limited frequency→... is looped) (small hit, The total number of prize balls such as a big hit) may be displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the total number of winning prize balls displayed on the effect display device SG when the second limited frequency state ends (or when the effect mode A shifts to the effect mode B). Is temporarily stored, and at the timing when the production mode in the second limited frequency state next time shifts from production mode A to production mode B, the total number of acquired award balls displayed at that timing is temporarily stored. The sum of the total number of winning prize balls may be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of winning awards balls displayed on the effect display device SG in the second limited frequency state is displayed by adding the number of winning awards balls due to the small hit, while the 0th limited frequency state and the first In the limited frequency state, it is desirable to configure so as not to display the number of prize balls obtained by the small hit (in order to make it appear that the payout speed is improved by the number of prize balls obtained by the small hit in the second limited frequency condition). The purpose of differentiating).

Although not particularly shown in this example, depending on the game state at the time of the big hit that triggered the special game, the game state transitions after the end of the special game related to the same big hit symbol (particularly, the time-reduced game state/limited frequency). State) and the duration thereof may be different. For example, in the present example, after the end of the time-reducing game, when the remaining second main game side holds a big hit related to the "7B" symbol, the second limited frequency is set after the special game related to the big hit ends. It may be configured not to set (for example, to set the first limited frequency).

Further, in the present example, the transition to the state advantageous to the player (the second limited frequency state in the present example) is made only at the end of the special game relating to one kind of big hit symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a plurality of jackpot symbols may be provided which shift to a state advantageous to the player after the special game is over. Further, in that case, the period in which the player is in an advantageous state differs depending on which jackpot pattern is hit (for example, 70 changes after the big hit A, 150 changes after the big hit B, and the like to the player. It may be configured such that it is in an advantageous state. In addition, if a plurality of small hit symbols and lost symbols are provided and a specific small hit symbol or lost symbol is won, it is possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player (meaning the second limited frequency in the present embodiment). You may comprise. In that case, as described above, depending on the gaming state at the time of small hit, the gaming state to be transferred after the small hit game relating to the same small hit symbol, and the duration thereof may be different.

In this example, when either the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped with a missing symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c are configured to be subtracted, but the invention is not limited to this. When forcibly stopped, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter MN52c may not be subtracted.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, after a big hit with a "5A" symbol on the first main game side, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (miss variation is 10 to 60 seconds, small hit variation) 75-95 seconds), the variation time on the second main game side is shorter (the variation of the loss is 0.5 seconds, the variation of the small hit is 1 second), so the small hits occur frequently and the small Although an example in which a pseudo bonus of winning a prize ball by a winning game can be created has been described, there are other specs of a gaming machine that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, when the first main game side does not result in a big hit with the "5A" symbol (for example, when the big hit occurs with a "7A" symbol), a limited frequency state different from the second limited frequency (for example, a loss). By configuring such that the fluctuation shifts to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation shifts to 1 to 10 seconds, a chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency is A gaming machine having different limited frequency states can be created.

In addition, limited frequency A, limited frequency B, limited frequency C, limited frequency D (variation efficiency on the second main game side: A>B>C>D) is provided, and a big hit or a small hit associated with a specific small hit symbol is provided. Alternatively, the limited frequency type may be switched. In the case of such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) is continued within the number of STs, the variation frequency on the second main game side becomes higher (=higher profitability of the player) in a limited frequency type. By configuring so as to switch (that is, the rank reduction of the fluctuation efficiency does not occur), it is possible to create a new game property in which the profitability of the player is increased every time the player is in the resort (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs). Will be reset the limited frequency type that has been set).

Further, in the present example, the variation efficiency of the second main game side is improved by shifting to the limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time of the second main game side is short is easily selected. , But is not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to this example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected, It may be configured to improve the relative fluctuation efficiency on the second main game side (the number of executions of the second main game fluctuation with respect to the first main game fluctuation) between the first main game and the second main game.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Here, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine having a gaming property in which both the winning of a prize ball by a special game and the winning of a prize ball by a small hit game can be enjoyed. It is also possible to adopt a structure specialized for winning prize balls by hitting. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 76 is a drawing showing the basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, in the fifth embodiment, the position and shape of the second main game starting opening B10 are described. In the fifth embodiment, the second main game starting port B10 is provided directly below the first main game starting port A10, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is the first main game starting port A10. It is configured so that it can enter any of the second main game starting ports B10. In addition, the second main game starting port B10 has a laterally long shape, and a game ball can always enter, and the game ball can easily enter (compared to the first example in this example). The game ball is configured to have a large opening into which the game ball can enter (the number of prize balls related to entering the second main game starting opening B10 is 1 ball).

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 6 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400(1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1400(2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the second main game side can be started even when the first main game side is changed, and the fluctuation of the first main game side is also changed when the second main game side is changed. Can be started (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400(1) {step 1400(2)} of FIG. 82 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, since the processing is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) variation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating), and the first main game symbol is not changing (in the case of the processing of the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ), and there is a hold of the main game symbol, and the condition is that the small hit game is not in progress. That is, since parallel lottery can be executed, when executing the process related to the first main game symbol, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol is changing, but the first main game symbol is changing. If there is, the fluctuation start condition related to the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, in step 1407-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads out the main game side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the pending information and shifts the remaining pending information (pending digestion). Next, in step 1407-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol winning/winning lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines a stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery, and temporarily stores these in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol win/loss result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation mode random number). Then, the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a command related to the information about the determined main game symbol and game state information (a command to the sub side, a symbol variation display start instruction command, etc.) To do. Next, in step 1407-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the variation mode, a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol, the first main game timer MP11t-C1 (second main game timer MP11t- Set to C2) and start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), the variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1407-11 whether the first (second) changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1407-11, the process proceeds to step 1407-12.

Next, in step 1407-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. If Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The variable display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-16. On the other hand, step 140
In the case of No in 7-12, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines in step 1407-14 whether or not the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The variable display of the main game symbol on the (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is stopped by making the stop symbol a lost symbol, and the display control of the lost symbol as a fixed stop symbol is performed, and the process proceeds to step 1407-16. ..

Next, in step 1407-16, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends the information indicating that the symbol variation is finished (symbol fixed display instruction command) to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control section SM side. To the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1407-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-18. Next, in step 1407-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1407-18, in step 1407-19, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407-18, in step 1407-20, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. If Yes in step 1407-20, in step 1407-21, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, if No at Step 1407-20, the process proceeds to Step 1500 (fourth).

Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described above. Next, in step 3350 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency end determination processing described above, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550). Even if No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

Next, FIG. 84 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the fifth embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the non-probability fluctuation/non-time shortening game state, the number of game balls shot and the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 Due to the difference from the award ball due to entering the ball, the player's possession ball gradually decreases.

Next, as shown in the section (b) of the same figure, in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the special winning opening C10 is shortly opened (a short time opening when the game ball is difficult to enter). Therefore, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). Here, triggered by the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the probability variation/time reduction game state is set, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

Next, as shown in the section (c) of the figure, in the probability variation/time shortening game state (second limited frequency), a small hit occurs with a probability of 1004/1024 (= almost every variation), The player's possession ball is increased by paying out the award ball due to the entry into the special winning opening C10 related to the small hit. The probability variation/time reduction game state (second limited frequency) of (c) is an ST (probability variation game state with a limited number of times) up to 200 variations, and is a game state with a high profitability for the player. is there.

Next, as shown in the section (d) of the same figure, in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5B", the special winning opening C10 is shortly opened (a short time opening when the game ball is difficult to enter). Therefore, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and the number of balls held by the player does not change (or is small). here,
When the special game related to the jackpot pattern "5B" is completed, the probability variation/time reduction game state is set, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type. In addition, since the upper limit number of probability variation game states is reset, the high profit state up to 200 variations is started again.

Next, since the section of FIG. 7E is similar to the game of FIG. 8E, its explanation is omitted. Incidentally, since the jackpot pattern on the second main game side only has "5B" that resets the upper limit number of probability variation game states, the upper limit number of probability variation numbers (200 variations in this example) is reached (or, In the case of winning the "7A" symbol on the first main game side), the probability variation/time reduction game state ends.

Next, FIG. 85 is a timing chart according to the transition of the game state in the fifth embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, in the non-probability variation/non-time shortening game state, a case where a big hit with the "5A" symbol is given will be described as an example. In the game before 1 in the figure, the variation time on the second main game side is likely to be long, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

First, at the timing 1 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed in response to the fact that the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol “5A”. In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the special winning opening C10 is short-opened, so it is difficult to obtain the prize ball by entering the big winning opening C10.

Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the special game relating to the big hit symbol "5A" is completed, and the probability shift game state with a limited number of times up to 200 changes (so-called, ST) is entered, and also , The second limited frequency is set.

Next, at a timing of 3 in the figure, the small hit game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol "BK" (at the time of the small hit game, the probability variation). The game state and the time saving game state are not switched). Incidentally, during the second limited frequency (3-4 and 5-6 in the figure), the variation time of the second main game symbol is likely to be short, and since the second main game side is a small hit with a high probability, The small hit game will occur continuously.

Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol "5B". In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the special winning opening C10 is short-opened, so it is difficult to obtain the prize ball by entering the big winning opening C10. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to a non-probable variation (non-probability variation game state).

Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, with the termination of the special game related to the big hit symbol "5B", the probability variation game state (so-called, ST) of up to 200 fluctuations is moved again, and also The second limited frequency is set.

Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the probability variation game state and the second limited frequency state will end with the main game symbol stopped and displayed 200 times within the period of 5-6 in the figure. .. Incidentally, the game after 6 in the figure is similar to the game before 1 in the figure, the variation time on the second main game side is likely to be long, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side. Become.

Next, referring to the lower part of the figure, in the non-probability variation/non-time shortening game state, a case where a big hit with the “7A” symbol is given will be described as an example. First, at the timing of the figure a, the 8R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol "7A".

Next, at the timing of b in the figure, with the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol "7A", the probability shift game state with a limited number of times up to 200 fluctuations (so-called, ST) is entered. However, since it does not shift to the second limited frequency state, the fluctuation on the second main game side is likely to be long after that, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

By changing as described above, the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment can always enter the first main game starting opening A10 and can always enter (the first main game starting opening A10 It has an easy second game starting opening B10, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed at the same time. Further, when the second limited frequency state is not, the variation time on the second main game side is likely to be long, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed. Further, in the second main game, it is configured to be a small hit with a high probability (probability of 1004/1024 in this example). Here, in the case of a big hit with a particular big hit symbol (in this example, "5A" and "5B"), a special game relating to the big hit (in this example, a special game in which the special winning opening C10 is shortly opened) Yes, it is a special game in which it is difficult to enter the game ball), and the second limited frequency state (and probability variation game state) tends to be short in the second main game side. With such a configuration, thereafter, the second limited frequency state ends (in the present example, the main game symbol is continuously displayed 200 times, is stopped and displayed in a symbol other than the jackpot, or is a jackpot in the "7A" symbol. Until the end), small wins occur consecutively, and a new game is created by winning a game ball by entering a game ball into the special winning opening A10 opened by the small hit. Can be done. In addition, since it is easy to enter the second main game starting port B10 at all times, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d (so-called electric chu) that supports entering the second main game starting port B10 is provided. There is no need to provide it. As a result, the number of members and the development cost can be reduced.

In this example, when either the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other symbol is forcibly stopped with a missing symbol. At this time, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c are configured to be subtracted, but the invention is not limited to this. When forcibly stopped, the value of the probability variation counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c may not be subtracted.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, after a big hit with the "5A" symbol on the first main game side, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (miss variation is 10 to 60 seconds, small hit variation) 75-95 seconds), the variation time on the second main game side is shorter (the variation of the loss is 0.5 seconds, the variation of the small hit is 1 second), so the small hits occur frequently and the small Although an example in which a pseudo bonus of winning a prize ball by a winning game can be created has been described, there are other specs of a gaming machine that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, when the first main game side does not result in a big hit with the "5A" symbol (for example, when the big hit occurs with a "7A" symbol), a limited frequency state different from the second limited frequency (for example, a loss). By configuring such that the fluctuation shifts to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation shifts to 1 to 10 seconds, a chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state which is a high profit state (the above-mentioned second limited frequency is A gaming machine having different limited frequency states can be created.

In addition, limited frequency A, limited frequency B, limited frequency C, limited frequency D (variation efficiency on the second main game side: A>B>C>D) is provided, and a big hit or a small hit associated with a specific small hit symbol is provided. Alternatively, the limited frequency type may be switched. In the case of such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) is continued within the number of STs, the variation frequency on the second main game side becomes higher (=higher profitability of the player) in a limited frequency type. By configuring so as to switch (that is, the rank reduction of the fluctuation efficiency does not occur), it is possible to create a new game property in which the profitability of the player is increased every time the player is in the resort (in that case, the upper limit of the number of STs). Will be reset, the limited frequency type that has been set).

Further, in the present example, the variation efficiency of the second main game side is improved by shifting to the limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time of the second main game side is short is easily selected. , But is not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to this example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state in which the variation mode in which the variation time on the first main game side is long is easily selected, It may be configured to improve the relative fluctuation efficiency on the second main game side (the number of executions of the second main game fluctuation with respect to the first main game fluctuation) between the first main game and the second main game.

(Sixth Embodiment)
The configuration as described in the above embodiment has a game property that allows the player to win balls by continuously generating a small hit game, but using such an idea, a novel feature different from the game property described above is provided. It is possible to create more playability. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the sixth embodiment is also a modified example based on the fifth embodiment, it should be supplemented that any configuration shown in the fifth embodiment can be applied to the sixth embodiment. ..

Next, FIG. 86 is a drawing showing the basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail.

First, in the sixth embodiment, the second big winning opening C20, the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is opened to the upper right of the outlet D36 and upper right of the first big winning opening C10 when the game is stopped. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entrance of the game ball, and the second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and the second special winning Mouth solenoid C24). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, in the second special winning opening electric part C21d, the second special winning opening C20 is placed in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win in the second special winning opening C20 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is made variable (the second special winning opening solenoid C24 is excited and made variable). In the sixth embodiment, the second special winning opening electric prize C21d is a flat member like the first special winning entrance electric prize C11d, but the first special winning entrance electric prize C11d is variable. Unlike the mode, the mode is changed in the vertical direction with respect to the game board (game area D30). That is, the second special winning opening electric part C21d is almost completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as a retracted state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). A state of protruding toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advancing state) is taken until it comes close to the board D16. Then, the second special winning opening electric auditors' product C21d protrudes from the game board (game area D30) to receive a game ball flowing down the game area D30 (a box-shaped member C20-1 (in this box-shaped member)). The game ball that has entered the ball enters the second big winning opening C20) as a lid, that is, when the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20- While the game ball can enter 1 (and by extension, in the second big winning opening C20), when the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended Then, the game ball cannot enter the second special winning opening C20) (the box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state).

The first special winning opening C10 is provided with the specific area C22 described above in the sixth embodiment, and the first special winning opening C10 is opened in the distribution game execution round in the special game. During the normal round in the special game (rounds other than the sorting game execution round in the special game) and the small hit game, the second big winning opening C20 will be opened.

Regarding the contents of the game developed on the game board, first, the game ball shot toward the game area D30 is a flow-down route formed on the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 (hereinafter, left-handed strike). There is a large difference in whether to flow down a route (which may be referred to as a route) or a flow-down route (hereinafter, also referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side of the game region D30 (based on the center of the game region). Be divided. Here, the game ball that has flowed down the left-handed route has the opportunity to enter the left first main game starting opening A10-1 or the first big winning opening C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route. Has an opportunity to enter the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the second big winning opening C20, the right first main game starting opening A10-2, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first big winning opening C10. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right-handed route is configured to enter the first big winning opening C10 more easily than the game ball flowed down on the left-handed route (“ball entering” "Easy to play" and "difficult to enter" are determined, for example, by the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot on the right-handed route and the left-handed route, respectively.)

Also, on the left-handed route (not shown), the game ball is guided or not guided toward the first main game starting opening A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. While adopting various flow-down modes, on the right-handing route (not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is small compared to the left-handing route, and a flow-down mode in which the game balls are substantially uniform. take.

More specifically, regarding the right-handed route, first, a game ball that is shot aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launch strength of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, is also called right-handed) , Flying inside the game area D30 along the outer rail D32, and falling by its own weight by colliding with a stopper member (member made of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) To start. Next, the fallen game ball has a high probability of entering the auxiliary game starting opening H10 immediately below it, and then the flow path width exceeds one game ball and less than two game balls. It is collected in D50 (collected regardless of whether or not it entered the auxiliary game starting port H10). Next, the game ball flowing down along the straightening passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the straightening passage D50, and is then slightly tilted leftward with respect to the horizontal direction. After rolling on each of the first, second-stage passage D51-2, and third-stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

Here, the first-stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3 are formed. , A game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed by being fixed in advance to the game board. That is, when the second special winning opening electric prize C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first special winning opening electric prize C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectifying passage D50. The game ball released from the rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 → the game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → The game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is released toward the outlet D36. , And so as to adopt a substantially uniform flow-down mode.

In this way, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route has a substantially uniform flow-down mode, so if you continuously shoot a game ball toward the right-handed route (one shot at approximately 0.6 second intervals) When the ball stably enters the game starting port H10 and the second winning a prize electric part C21d is in the open state (withdrawal state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension the second large winning port) It can be configured to stably enter the inside of C20) and stably enter the first special winning opening C10 when the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d is opened. Incidentally, the game ball discharged from the second stage passage D51-2, in the space until reaching the third stage passage D51-3, the first main game start port electric role that can take a retracted state and an advanced state If the object A11-2d is provided and the first main game starting opening electric role object A11-2d is in the advanced state, it is possible to guide the game ball toward the right first main game starting opening A10-2. Is configured.

Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, the game ball discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second special winning opening electric role object C21d in the advanced state. If so, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d may be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the flow-rectifying passage D50, it is essential to have a configuration for cutting off the momentum of the game ball that has flowed down (substantially falling) in the flow-rectifying passage D50. In the sixth embodiment, as shown in the figure near the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the passage wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 has a shape protruding toward the inside of the rectifying passage D50, and by this shape, the inside of the rectifying passage D50 is played. By dropping the ball in a zigzag manner, it is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball. Incidentally, in the sixth embodiment, the same reasoning is also provided with a configuration for cutting off the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1, The points will be described later.

Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 82 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is step 1410-3 (sixth), the purpose of which is to adjust the jackpot winning probability and the small hit winning probability during the execution of the parallel lottery, as will be described later. When staying in a certain gaming state, the selection tendency (in other words, the lottery table used for lottery of the varying time) relating to the variation time of the main gaming symbol is made uniform (while staying in a certain gaming state If so, the lottery table is not changed). That is, in step 1410-2, after determining the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol, in step 1410-3 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol hit/miss lottery result and the first main game content determination. The variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol is determined based on a random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation mode random number), and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area, and step 1407- Move to 7. Note that the limitation frequency end determination processing {step 3350 (fourth)}, which is the processing relating to the limitation frequency of the fifth embodiment, is deleted.

Next, FIG. 88 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing in the sixth embodiment. First, as a feature of the main game table 1 (winning/winning lottery table), a small hit is provided on both the first main gaming side and the second main playing side, and a big win is won as a result of the winning/winning lottery. The probability is 5/1024 during the non-stochastic variation game and 7/1024 during the probability variation game. Further, the probability of a small win as a result of the win/loss lottery on the first main game side is 17/1024, and the probability of a small win as a result of the win/loss lottery on the second main game side is 1016/1024. Further, the probability of losing as a result of the winning/winning lottery on the first main game side is 1002/1024 during the non-probability variation game and 1000/1024 during the probability variation game, and the probability of losing or winning the second main game side. As a result, the probability of losing is 3/1024 during the non-probability fluctuation game and 1/1024 during the probability fluctuation game. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the winning/winning lottery result on the second main game side is configured to be a small win. On the first main game side, in both the non-probability variation game state and the probability variation game state, as a result of the winning/disapproving lottery, the selection rate is "miss: small hit ≥ big hit". On the other hand, on the second main game side, in both the non-probability variation game state and the probability variation variation game state, as a result of the winning/disapproving lottery, the selection rate is “small hit ≧large hit ≧miss”. On the first main game side, it suffices that the loss is most easily selected, and the random numbers may be distributed so that "miss ≥ big hit ≥ small hit" (especially, even if small hit is not provided. Good). Further, on the second main game side, it is only necessary that the small hit is most easily selected, and the random numbers may be distributed so that "small hit ≥ loss ≥ big hit".

Next, as a feature of the main game table 2 (symbol determination table), a big hit symbol (4A in this example) in which the second major winning opening C20 is shortly opened is provided on the first main gaming side. On the other hand, the second main game side is not provided with a big hit symbol in which the second big winning opening C20 is shortly opened. In addition, the big hit symbol with the largest total number of prize balls in one big hit is "7A/7B" in which a special game of 16R is executed, and is configured to pay out "2400 balls" at the maximum (details) Will be described later).

Next, as a feature of the main game table 3 (variation mode determination table), on the second main game side, in a probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state (a latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) Irrespective of whether the result is positive or negative, only the shortest variation time (1 second in this example) is selected. With this configuration, in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (latency certainty variation state with so-called non-electric power support state), when right-handing is executed, small hits continuously occur at short intervals. It is configured to continue winning (the effect created by this configuration will be described later). Also, in a game state (especially non-stochastic variation game state) other than the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called latent probability variation state with so-called non-electrical support state), during a big hit, a relatively short time variation Only the time (5 seconds in this example) is selected, and only a relatively long fluctuation time (100 minutes or more in this example) is selected at the time of loss or small hit. It has become. Also, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the average variation time at the time of a big hit of the second main gaming symbol, and in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) The average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than during the big hit is "the average fluctuation time of the second main gaming symbol other than during the big hit in the normal gaming state> the average fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol during the big hit in the normal gaming state. It is a "time" relationship. Also, in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state), the average variation time other than when the second main game symbol big hit, and probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state (so-called non-electric support state Latent probability variation state accompanied by) the average fluctuation time of the second main gaming symbol in the "normal fluctuation time other than the big hit of the second main gaming symbol in the normal gaming state> probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening in the gaming state There is a relationship of "average fluctuation time of two main game symbols". Moreover, after the timing when the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (the latent probability variation state with the so-called non-electric support state) are finished, the variation time of the second main game symbol becomes extremely long, At this timing, there is a high possibility that the second main game hold will remain, and after that timing, there is a concern that the progress of the game will be hindered if the game is left-handed. Therefore, in order to forcibly stop the remaining hold with a loss (in order to digest the remaining hold as a loss), a small hit on the first main game side appears at an appropriate frequency (17/1024 in this example). (Note that the variation time in that case is 3 seconds). Specifically, during the fluctuation of the second main game symbol (especially during the symbol fluctuation related to the small hit symbol), the symbol fluctuation related to the small hit symbol on the first main gaming side ends, and the first main game side When the small hit game is started, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped by a lost symbol, so that the fluctuation of the second main game symbol can be ended and the second main game The small hit game on the side can be prevented from being executed. In the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, the start of the small hit game on the second main game side causes the variation of the changing first main game symbol to be forcibly stopped with a missing symbol, In the fourth embodiment, due to the fluctuation of the main game symbol a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times) in the jackpot or the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortened game state on the second main game side, the probability variation game state and the non-variable state. Since the game property is such that the time-reduced game state can be ended, all the stop symbols related to the fluctuations on the first main game side in the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state are configured to be lost symbols. .. In this way, the difference in the average value of the fluctuation time that may differ depending on the game state is configured such that the difference in the fluctuation time on the second main game side is larger than the difference on the fluctuation time on the first main game side. ..

Further, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped,
When the other main game side is changing the symbol, it is configured to forcibly stop the symbol change on the other main game side with a missing symbol, but it is not limited to this, and a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol. When the fluctuation of the other main game symbol is started during the fluctuation related to the symbol, the winning/winning lottery result of the other main game symbol is forcibly converted to a loss at the fluctuation start timing, and a certain big hit symbol or At the variation stop timing related to the small hit symbol, the variation of the other main game symbol may be stopped.

It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration of the main game table 3 (variation mode determination table) in the sixth embodiment is changed, and, for example, (1) a probability variation game state and a game state that is not the non-time reduction game state , On the first main game side, it is possible to shift to a limited frequency state upon the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, (2) if the game state is not a probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state, the first main game symbol If there are many types of variation modes related to the side (for example, 100 types), (3) probability variation game state and a game state that is not the non-time shortened game state, the average value of the variation time related to the first main game side is Medium time (shorter than the long time on the second main game side and longer than the short time on the second main game side, for example, 30 seconds), (4) Stochastic variation game state and non-time If the gaming state is not the shortened gaming state, the second main gaming side does not shift to the limited frequency state (does not shift even if the first main gaming side is in the limited frequency state), (5) probability variation gaming state and If the gaming state is not a non-time shortened gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the second main gaming symbol side (for example, one type), (6) probability variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state If the state, the average value of the variation time related to the second main game symbol side is a long time (for example, 100 minutes), (7) If the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, the first main On the game side, the frequency does not shift to the limited frequency state, (8) If the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, there are few types of variation modes related to the first main game symbol side (probability variation game state and non It is a number that is larger than the type of the variation mode related to the second main game symbol side when the game state is not the time-reduced game state, for example, 5 types), (9) probability variation game state and non-time-reduced game state. If it is, the average value of the variation time related to the first main game symbol side is a short time (for example, 3 seconds), (10) if the probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, the second main game On the side, it does not shift to the limited frequency state, (11) probability variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side (probability variation gaming state and non-time It is a number that is larger than the type of variation mode relating to the second main gaming symbol side when it is a gaming state that is not a shortened gaming state, for example, 5 types), (12) probability variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state. If there is, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the second main game symbol side is short (eg, For example, it may be 3 seconds). {All the configurations of (1) to (12) may be satisfied at the same time, or they may be appropriately combined}. In addition, the configurations (1) to (12) may be applied only when there is a loss. Further, in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, the first main game side may be configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state upon the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and configured as such. By doing so, parallel lottery can be executed, and when the right hit is executed in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, either the first main game starting port or the second main game starting port Also, in the case of a configuration that can enter the ball, by extending the variation time of the first main game symbol when shifting to the limited frequency state, until the big hit on the first main game side The average time can be lengthened, that is, the time during which the small hits on the second main game side continue can be lengthened. Further, the predetermined condition which is the transition condition to the limited frequency state described above is, for example, a stop of a specific symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, a cumulative number of symbol fluctuations after a big hit or a small hit is a predetermined number of times. Reach, etc. The big hit symbols and the small hit symbols according to the predetermined conditions may be all big hit symbols and/or all small hit symbols, or may be specific big hit symbols and/or specific small hit symbols.

Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) of FIG. 36 in the sixth embodiment. In the figure, differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail. The difference from the second embodiment is steps 1854 (sixth) to 1858 (sixth), step 1864 (sixth), steps 1888 (sixth) and 1890 (sixth), that is, step 1852. If the distribution game in-execution flag is off (that is, at the start of the round), in step 1854 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (second symbol). 1 big winning opening C10 is the big hit design which becomes long opening, in this example, it judges whether or not it is 5A*7A*5B*7B). If Yes in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1856 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long opening pattern of the first special winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example, for 30 seconds). Is opened to facilitate the winning of the prize in the specific area C22), and the procedure proceeds to step 1860. On the other hand, if No in step 1854 (sixth), in step 1858 (sixth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the short opening pattern of the first special winning opening C10 having the specific area C22 (for example, It is opened for 0.01 seconds to make it difficult to win a prize in the specific area C22), and the process proceeds to step 1860.

In addition, after turning on the distribution game execution flag in step 1862, in step 1864 (sixth), the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the first special winning opening C10 in the set opening pattern, Move to 1888 (sixth). Incidentally, when the distribution game in-execution flag is turned on in step 1852, the process proceeds to step 1888 (sixth). Next, in step 1888 (sixth), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) of winnings have been won in the first special winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1888 (sixth), in step 1890 (sixth), the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the first special winning opening C10, and proceeds to step 1872. Note that if No in step 1888 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 1868, and if Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1890 (sixth). Further, in the second embodiment, the special winning opening to be opened in the distribution game execution round was the second special winning opening C20, but in the sixth embodiment, the big prize to be opened in the distribution game execution round. The mouth is the first big winning opening C10.

Here, the chart in the upper part of the figure shows the average number of prize balls for each big hit in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the table, in the sixth embodiment, the big hit symbol having the largest total number of prize balls in one big hit is "7A/7B", and the maximum is "15 balls x 10 balls x 16R". Is configured to pay out "2400 balls" (details of the action created by this configuration will be described later). Incidentally, in the sixth embodiment, the distribution game execution round is "3R, 5R" in all the big hit symbols.

Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (sixth) of FIG. 17 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1680-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1680-1, in step 1680-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c to a predetermined number (200 times in this example). Next, in step 1680-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1680-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1680-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol relating to the finished special game is a probability variation/time saving big hit symbol (7A/7B in this example). If Yes in step 1680-5, in step 1680-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to the predetermined number A (200 times in this example), and then step 1680-9 Move to.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680-1, in step 1680-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol relating to the special game that has ended is the short-time jackpot symbol (4A in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1680-7, in step 1680-8, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number B (50 times in this example) to the count value of the time saving counter MP52c, and step 1680-9 Move to.

Next, in step 1680-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}. Even if No in step 1680-5 or step 1680-7, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1700 (third)}.

In this way, in the sixth embodiment, when a probability variation game state is entered, a predetermined number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game related to the transition (stop of the jackpot symbol related to the special game) Due to this, the probability variation game state ends (shifts to the normal game state) (so-called ST). In addition, due to the entry of the game ball into the specific area C22 provided in the first big winning opening C10, a game machine that shifts to a probability variation game state after the end of the special game (a so-called ball certain type game Machine). Further, after the special game when the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to "5A/5B" (and when the player enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to "4A", the special game ends. It is configured to become a probability variation game state and a non-time shortened game state (latency certainty change state with so-called non-electric power support state) (later later but basically not entering) (No in step 1799-5). In the case of, the stop design is "5A/5B", or a part of the case where the stop design is "4A"). Incidentally, in the sixth embodiment, during the special game related to the short and big hit pattern (4A), if there is a ball into the specific area C22 (if the main game probability change reservation flag is turned on), the probability Although it is configured to shift to the variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (for the hour/hour counter MP52c, step 1799- It is desirable to set a predetermined number B of 8), and it may be configured to shift to a normal game state (non-stochastic variation game state and non-time shortening game state).

Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (sixth) of FIG. 72 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1745-1, in step 1745-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1745-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1745-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the current stop symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (the first main game side small hit symbol, in this example, AK). Or not. If Yes in step 1745-4, in step 1745-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the small hit game timer MP41t to the first opening time (when the small hit game relating to the first main game is executed. Time, which is 0.01 second in this example), and the process proceeds to step 1745-8. On the other hand, if No in step 1745-4, in other words, if the current stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (the small hit symbol on the second main game side, in this example, BK), step 1745-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the small hit game timer MP41t, the second opening time (the time set when the small hit game related to the second main game is executed, in this example, 1. 7 seconds). Next, in step 1745-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit start command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game has started (sub-command by the control command transmission process of step 1999). (Transmitted to the main control unit SM side), and proceeds to step 1745-8. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the small hitting start command is configured to be set only when the small hitting game relating to the second main game side small hitting symbol (BK in this example) is executed. It is not set when the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the main game side. Therefore, when the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is stopped, it is difficult for the player to detect the small hit even if the player visually confirms the effect, and it is difficult to obtain the game ball by the small hit. It has become (because I have not performed right-handed). Incidentally, the small hit symbol on the first main game side (AK in this example) is a long-term variation of the second main game symbol in the normal game state (non-probability variation game state and non-time shortening game state) (100 Role of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of more than a second) with a missing symbol (for example, triggered by the cumulative number of fluctuations of the main game symbol, a probability variation game state and a non-time shortened game state (a latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state) From the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the role of forcibly stopping the symbol variation relating to the remaining second main gaming side is held}. In addition, when the small hitting game execution concerning the small hitting design of this 1st main game side (AK in this example), and the small hitting game execution concerning the small hitting design of this 2nd main game side (BK in this example) In any case of time, it may be configured to set a small hit start command, and in such a case, a small hit pattern (AK in this example) on the first main game side It is desirable that the small hit start command to be set at the time of hit game execution and the small hit start command to be set at the time of small hit game execution related to the second main game side small hit symbol (BK in this example) are different commands. , For example, when the small hitting game related to the first main game side small hitting pattern (AK in this example) is executed, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize on the effect display device SG (for example, the display area is small) right. A striking instruction display is displayed (there may be no sound), and when the small hit game related to the second main game side small hit pattern (BK in this example) is executed, the player visually recognizes it on the effect display device SG. A right-handing instruction display (for example, a large display area) that is easy to perform may be displayed (may be notified by voice).

Next, in step 1745-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20, starts the small hit game timer MP41t, and shifts to step 1747-1. Further, in the case of No in step 1745-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1745-9 whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1745-9, the process moves to step 1747-1.

Next, in step 1747-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes at step 1747-1, the process proceeds to step 1747-3 if No, at step 1747-2 if No, the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the small hit game timer MP41t to reach a predetermined time ( It is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed). If Yes in step 1747-2, the process moves to step 1747-3. Next, in step 1747-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (the second main game side small hit symbol, in this example, BK). Determine whether. If Yes in step 1747-3, in step 1747-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit end command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game has ended (control in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the command transmission processing), and the process proceeds to step 1747-5. On the other hand, if No in step 1747-3, in other words, if the stop symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (the first main game side small hit symbol, in this example, AK) Shift to 1747-5 (similar to the above-mentioned small hit start command, the small hit end command is set only during the small hit game related to the second main game small hit symbol). In the sixth embodiment, the special winning opening that is opened in the small hitting game is the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1747-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1747-6, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M stops and resets (zero-clears) the small hitting game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1747-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1745-9 or step 1747-2, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Here, the chart in the upper part of the figure is the average number of prize balls for each small hit symbol in the sixth embodiment. As shown in the table, in the sixth embodiment, the average total number of prize balls in one small hit (that is, the expected value of the number of game balls that the player can obtain by one small hit) is In the case of “AK”, it is relatively small as “1.5 balls”, while in the case of “BK” it is relatively large as “15 balls”, that is, the small amount related to “AK”. In most cases, the second big winning opening C20 is configured so that no game ball enters the second big winning opening C20, while in the small hit related to "BK", the second big winning opening is often used. One or more game balls enter C20.

Next, FIG. 92 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the sixth embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the normal game state (non-stochastic variation game state and non-time shortening game state), the number of game balls shot and the left first main game starting opening A10-1 Due to the difference from the award ball due to entering the ball, etc., the player's possession ball gradually decreases.

Next, as shown in the section (b) of the same figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", a right-handed game is played, and a prize ball is obtained by entering the first big winning opening C10. By being paid out, the player's balls will increase. After that, triggered by the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (a latent probability change state with a so-called non-electric power support state) are set. If the second main game symbol is being variably displayed when the jackpot symbol “5A” is stopped (this phenomenon may occur because the so-called parallel lottery is adopted), Even if the second main game symbol is planned to be stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol, the second main game symbol will be forcibly stopped with a lost symbol.

Next, as shown in the section (c) of the figure, in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (a latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric support state), in the winning/winning lottery on the second main game side, 1016/1024 (= almost every change), the small hit is won, and in the latent probability variation state, the symbol change related to the small hit is short (1 second in this example). The balls held by the player are increased by paying out the prize balls due to the balls entering the second big winning opening C20 related to the small hit. The probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric power support state) of (c) are STs (probability variation game state with a limited number of times) up to 200 variations. Further, in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (the latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric power support state) of (c), since the probability of being a big hit is 7/1024 per variation, an average of 146 variations continue. However, due to the symbol variation of 146 times, the small hit is won on average 145 times, so the probability variation of (c) the gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state during the stay, the total of the small hits relating to the second main game The average number of prize balls is 2175.

Next, as shown in the section (d) of the same figure, during the special game related to the big hit symbol "7B", a prize ball is paid out by, for example, entering the second big winning opening C20, The player's ball will increase. Here, triggered by the end of the special game related to the big hit symbol "7B", the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state (so-called probability variation state with a so-called electric support state). As described above, the “7B” is the jackpot pattern that can most pay out the game ball in the fourth embodiment, and the “2400 ball” prize ball is paid out in the jackpot related to the “7B”. Become.

Here, the section from (c) to (d) mentioned above includes the big hit related to the "7B" symbol in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (latency certainty variation state with so-called non-electric support state). It is a series of flows that can win game balls, but in the series of flows, the section (c), that is, the section for winning prize balls by small hits (or the section for winning prize balls excluding big hits) ), the total average number of prize balls is “2145 balls”, while the section (d), that is,
The total amount in the section that wins the prize balls according to the jackpot with the maximum number of prize balls (the jackpot with the maximum number of prize balls among all the jackpots of the first main game side and the second main game side). The average number of prize balls is "2400 balls", and the composition is "total prize ball count by big hit> total prize ball count by small hit". It also has a structure of "total number of prize balls by big hit> total number of prize balls excluding big hit".

Next, as shown in the section (e) of the figure, in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state (so-called probability variation state with so-called electric support state), the player plays the game by right-handing, and the right A game ball is to be fired toward the 1 main game starting opening A10-2, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side. In addition, by the prize ball by the game ball entering the right first main game starting opening A10-2, the game can be progressed while maintaining the possession ball.

With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state (the latent probability changing state with the so-called non-electric support state), 2 The variation time related to the main game symbol is set to a relatively short time (1 second in this example), and the game is advanced by firing a game ball toward the second main game starting opening B10 by right-handing. On the other hand, in the case of a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state (probably changing state with a so-called electric support state), the variation time relating to the second main game symbol is relatively long (100 in this example). (Longer than a minute), and is configured to shoot a game ball toward the right first main game starting opening A10-2 by right-handing to advance the game. In the case of a probability variation game state and a non-time shortened game state (a latent probability variation state with a so-called non-electric power support state), the small winning related to the entry into the second main game starting opening B10 is continuously won. By increasing the number of game balls by this, the game performance expected to win the big hit is achieved. On the other hand, in the case of a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state (so-called probability variation state with so-called electric support state), the first main game start opening With the prize ball of the electric accessory A11-2d, the player can expect to win the big hit while maintaining the ball, and even when the game progresses by hitting the right, a plurality of different game characteristics depending on the game state are realized. It will be possible.

(First Modification from Sixth Embodiment)
In the sixth embodiment, the configuration in which the number of balls held can be increased by successively winning the small hit has been described in detail, but such a gaming machine has only the configuration of the sixth embodiment. It is not limited to. Therefore, a configuration in which the number of balls held is increased by a series of small hits different from the sixth embodiment is referred to as a first modification from the sixth embodiment, and only the modifications from the sixth embodiment will be described below in detail.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the first modification from the sixth embodiment can execute the parallel lottery as illustrated in the sixth embodiment, and does not have the V winning opening C27 and the specific area C22. I am trying.

First, FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a basic structure on the front surface side of the gaming machine in Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

In the modified example 1 of the sixth embodiment, two starting ports of a first main game starting port A10 and a first main game starting port A10-2 are provided as the first main game starting port, and the first main game starting port is provided. The game starting opening A10 is configured such that a game ball flowing down on the left side of the game area D30 can easily enter, and a game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area D30 can easily enter. Further, the first main game starting opening A10-2, the second main game starting opening B10 and the auxiliary game starting opening H10 are provided on the right side of the game area D30, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 enters. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is configured to be difficult to enter. It should be noted that the second main game starting port B10 is not provided with an electric accessory, and the first main game starting port A10-2 makes it easy to enter the first main game starting port A10-2. To the open state and the closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball (displaceable based on the result of the auxiliary game) the first main game starting port electric accessory A11d and the first main game starting port A10-2 It has a first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s-2 for detecting entrance. In addition, the 1st big winning a prize mouth C10 and the 1st big winning a prize electric prize C11d, the game sphere which flows down the right side of the game territory D30 (based on the center of the game territory) is easy to be guided, the left side of the game territory D30 flows down. It is configured so that the game balls to be played are difficult to guide.

Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to step 1700 (sixth) of FIG. 72 in the first modification from the sixth embodiment. The change from the sixth embodiment is step 3800 (sixth variation 1), that is, after the small hit execution flag is turned off in step 1747-7, the main control is performed in step 3800 (sixth variation 1). The CPU MC of the board M executes a small hit related time saving end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit related time saving end determination process in the first modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 3802, in step 3804, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stopped small hit symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (AK in this example). If Yes in step 3804, in step 3806, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 3808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 3802 or step 3804, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). In this way, in the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the time reduction game state ends when the first main game side wins the small hit in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. That is, it is configured to shift to the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state. Further, as in the sixth embodiment, in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, the variation efficiency of the second main game symbol becomes extremely good (variation time becomes short), so that the second main Frequent wins on the game side will increase the number of balls you have. As a main game flow, (1) a left-handed game is executed in a non-stochastic variation game state and a non-time-reduced game state, and a game is advanced by entering a ball into the first main game start opening A10. 2) By winning the big hit on the first main game side, after the big hit ends, it shifts to a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state, (3) a right strike is executed in the probability variation game state and a time shortening game state , The game progresses by entering the ball into the first main game starting opening A10-2 (Although it also enters the second main game starting opening B10, the variation efficiency is extremely poor, so by the second main game small hit (The number of balls does not increase), (4) By winning the first main game small hit, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are changed to the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, and the right-handing continues Then, the first main game starting port electric accessory A11d becomes difficult to open, so that the first main game starting port A10-2 does not enter the ball and the variation efficiency of the second main game symbol is extremely good. As a result, the winning of the second main game small hit symbol occurs frequently.

By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the sixth embodiment, the time reduction game state ends by winning the first main game small hit symbol (from the time reduction game state to the non-time reduction game state). By changing the configuration so that it can be changed to), a gaming state that is advantageous to two players, that is, a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state, and a probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state, are played continuously. It is possible to make it a highly entertaining game machine that can expect more winnings.

Incidentally, as a configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the sixth embodiment, (1) the display of the decorative symbol relating to the second main gaming symbol is not executed (in the case of the non-stochastic variation gaming state (2) In order to prevent the player from right-handing, (2) The time for opening the special winning opening at the big hit and the small hit related to the second main game side is set to be relatively short (non-probability variation game state). In the case of, in order to prevent the game ball from entering the special winning opening even if the player hits the big hit or the small hit on the second main game side and then starts right-handed), (3) It may be configured such that a mechanism for slowing down the flow rate when the game balls flow down, such as around the flow control passage D50 of the sixth embodiment, is provided.

(Modification 2 from the sixth embodiment)
In the modified example 1 from the sixth embodiment, a small hit game relating to the first main game small hit symbol is executed, so that the time shortened game state can be shifted to the non-time shortened game state. The structure in which the time reduction game state can be ended by the small hit is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration in which the time reduction game state can be ended by a small hit and a configuration different from the modification example 1 from the sixth embodiment will be referred to as a modification example 2 from the sixth embodiment, and hereinafter, from the sixth embodiment. Only the changes from the first modification will be described in detail.

The configuration of the gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment can execute the parallel lottery as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, and the V winning opening C27 as exemplified in the third embodiment. Is configured to have.

First, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the small hit related time saving end determination process in the second modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3810, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 3810, in step 3812, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is no ball entering the V winning opening C27 during the small hit. If Yes in step 3812, in step 3814, the CPU MC of the main control board M is a time/short medium/small hit continuous counter (increment counter, for measuring the number of small hits continuously won in the time reduction game state. 1) is added to the counter value. Next, in step 3816, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the count value of the time/short/medium/small hit continuous counter is the time/time end value (2 in this example). If Yes in step 3816, in step 3818, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. In the modified example 2 from the sixth embodiment, even if the small hit which does not enter the V winning opening C27 in the time shortening game state continues for a predetermined number of times, the hour-short medium-small hit continuous counter value increases. Therefore, it will be shifted to the non-time shortened gaming state. Next, in step 3820, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to step 3824. Even if No in Step 3810 and Step 3812, the process proceeds to Step 3824. Next, in step 3824, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time/short/medium/small hit continuous counter to zero, and proceeds to the next process (step 1997). Even if No in step 3816, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the sixth embodiment, the small hit pattern and the non-time shortened to shift to the time shortening game state after the special game with the small hit symbol as an opportunity is finished. In addition to providing a small hit symbol that shifts to the game state, in a time shortening game state, a small hit that did not enter the V winning opening C27 continues for a predetermined number of times to a non-time shortening game state. By configuring so as to be able to shift, when the small hit symbol that will shift to the non-time shortened game state after the end of the special game that shifts by entering the V winning port C27 is stopped, the V winning port While not entering the game ball into C27, when the small hit symbol that shifts to the time shortening game state after the special game is stopped, the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening C27 and the design value is exceeded. It is possible to prevent the situation where the ball is won, and even though the player shoots the game ball toward the second big winning opening during the special game in which it is easy to win the V winning opening C27. In the event of a situation in which a prize cannot be won in the V winning opening C27, if the player enters the V winning opening C27 at the time of the next small hit game, the user-friendly gaming machine does not have to shift to a non-time shortened gaming state. can do.

(Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment)
In the sixth embodiment to the second modification from the sixth embodiment, the playability in the gaming machine having the small hit is illustrated, but the configuration of the gaming machine having the small hit is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration of a gaming machine having a small hit different from the above-described configuration will be referred to as a modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment, and only the modified points from the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 97 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. Here, the points of change from the sixth embodiment are step 1700 (sixth variation 3) and step 3150 (sixth variation 3). That is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, in step 1700 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later, and shifts to step 1950 (third). To do. After executing the prize ball payout control process in step 1997, in step 3150 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1999.

Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 82 in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. .. First, in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1403-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main game side random number in step 1403-2. Next, in step 1403-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the read main game side random number from the suspension information and shifts the remaining suspension information (in this example, the suspension digestion). Next, in step 1403-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially winning lottery random number), based on the game state, the main game symbol winning or winning Execute a lottery. Next, in step 1403-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the main game symbol win/win lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, symbol lottery random number) Determine the stop symbol for the main game symbol. Next, in step 1403-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the main game symbol win/loss result, the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number) and the main The variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol is determined based on the stop symbol relating to the game symbol. Next, in step 3650 (sixth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a variable fixed time determination process described later. Next, in step 1403-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the command related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) and the current game. A command relating to the state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). To) Next, in step 1403-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1403-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the display unit B21g), the variable display of the main game symbol is started in accordance with the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area. Next, in step 1403-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1403-12. In addition, in the case of No in step 1403-1, in step 1403-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 1403-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M moves to step 1403-12.

Next, in step 1403-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1403-12, in step 1403-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits information (symbol fixed display instruction command) indicating that the symbol variation is finished to the sub-main control section SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1403-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the display unit B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area is displayed and controlled as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1403-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag. Next, in step 1403-17, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the determined fixed fluctuation time in the fixed fluctuation time timer and starts. Next, in step 1403-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variation fixed flag, and proceeds to step 1403-20. In addition, in the case of No in step 1403-13, in step 1403-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation fixing flag is ON. In the case of Yes at step 1403-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M moves to step 1403-20.

Next, in step 1403-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the variable fixed time timer value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1403-20, in step 1403-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the variation fixed flag. Next, in step 1403-22, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1403-22, in step 1403-23, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a big hit symbol stop command (command to the sub side). Next, in step 1403-24, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403-22, in step 1403-25, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. If Yes in step 1403-25, in step 1403-26, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag, and proceeds to step 1500 (fourth). Note that if No in 1403-25, the process proceeds to step 1500 (fourth).

Next, in step 1500 (fourth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (step 1550). On the other hand, also in the case of No in steps 1403-12 and 1403-20, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Even if No in step 1403-19, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550).

Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3650 (sixth variation 3) of FIG. 98 in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3652, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is on. Next, in the case of Yes in step 3652, in step 3654, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variation is a symbol variation related to the second main game. If Yes in step 3654, in step 3656, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variation is a symbol variation related to a small hit. If Yes in step 3656, in step 3658, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation fixed time of the symbol variation to be a long time (for example, 30 seconds), and the next processing (processing of step 1403-8) Move to. If No in step 3652, step 3654, or step 3656, in step 3660, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation fixed time of the variation to be short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and The process moves to the process (the process of step 1403-8). Thus, in the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment, the variation fixed time related to the small winning symbol on the second main game side in the time shortening game state is another variable fixed time (for example, a main not a small winning symbol). Fixed time variation of the game symbol, time reduction variable fixed time of the small winning symbol on the second main gaming side when not in the gaming state, variable fixed time of the small winning symbol on the first main gaming side, etc.) Has become. Further, by configuring in this manner, when the small hit on the second main game side is won in the time shortening game state, the second main game hold is generated before the small hit related to the small hit symbol is started. It is configured to guarantee the time to let.

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process in the third modification from the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1703-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demonstration flag is off. If Yes in step 1703-1, in step 1703-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge standby flag is off. If Yes in step 1703-2, in step 1703-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1703-3, in step 1703-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1703-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the opening pattern of the special winning opening for the round. Next, in step 1703-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1703-8, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening and starts the small hitting game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1703-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer in this example), and proceeds to step 1703-11. On the other hand, if No in step 1703-3, in step 1703-10, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1703-10, the process proceeds to step 1703-11. Next, in step 1703-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a winning at the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1703-11, in step 1703-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (10 in this example) of winning in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1703-12, the process proceeds to step 1703-14. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1703-11 or step 1703-12, at step 1703-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hitting game timer value has reached a predetermined time. If Yes in step 1703-13, the process proceeds to step 1703-14.

Next, in step 1703-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1703-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge standby flag, and proceeds to step 1703-16. Even if No in step 1703-2, the process proceeds to step 1703-16.

Next, in step 1703-16, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the discharge standby timer value is the discharge standby time end value (13 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 1703-16, in step 1703-17, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1703-18, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge standby flag. Next, in step 1703-19, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 1703-19, in step 1703-20, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the small hit end demo timer to show a small hit end demo time A (which is shorter than the small hit end demo time B described later, In this example, 3 seconds) is set and started, and the process proceeds to step 1703-22. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1703-19, in step 1703-21, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the small hit end demo timer to show the small hit end demo time B (which is longer than the small hit end demo time A described above. Yes, in this example, 5 seconds) is set to start and the process proceeds to step 1703-22.

Next, in step 1703-22, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit end demonstration flag, and proceeds to step 1703-23. Even if No in step 1703-1, the process proceeds to step 1703-23. Next, in Step 1703-23, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit end demo timer value is zero. If Yes in step 1703-23, in step 1703-24, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit completion demonstration flag. Next, in step 1703-25, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets (zero-clears) the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1703-26, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1997). Even if No in step 1703-10, step 1703-13, step 1703-16, or step 1703-23, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997).

Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 3150 (sixth variation 3) in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 3154, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and, based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, sends it to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1999).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output through the external relay terminal board G according to the third modification from the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). On the external relay terminal board G, a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or winning of symbols, current game state (normal game state, Specific game state, special game state, etc.) output terminal for game state information output, error information for outputting various error information detected by opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Output terminals and the like} are provided. As will be described later, the output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. Output terminals other than the one output terminal are terminals for outputting a signal output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a jackpot during jackpot (there are a plurality of jacks depending on the type of jackpot). ), a door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a starting opening winning time output terminal that outputs a signal when a winning is won, and there is not enough balls in the prize ball tank KT. While the output terminal for the ball output when outputting the signal, the output terminal for the number of special symbol determination output that outputs the signal when the special symbol determination stop, etc. of the game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator side It is an output terminal. That is, by using the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals of these important game related information.

Further, in the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are in the form of one-way serial transmission of game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G. It is configured to send. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, the outline of the information transmission system of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment will be explained. First, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G. , And the external relay terminal board G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It does not mean that That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level/Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON/OFF) by the section, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input/output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force causes the contact portion G2 to be closed, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected. Therefore, on the side of the hall computer HC, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal that is substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G by detecting the conducting period. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the side of the hall computer HC to the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable the one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the goto action. However, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and One-way communication is also possible by a photo sensor having a light receiving portion (for example, light from a light emitting portion connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a hall computer HC). It is possible to receive a signal by reading it with a section).

However, since the physical signal (switch state is turned on/off) is once replaced, the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC by one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input/output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input/output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the special symbol determination frequency, It is customary to configure such that only information indicating that "1 variation of the special symbol has ended" can be transmitted).

Next, referring to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 of FIG. 102, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board in the third modification from the sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures in case of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

First, the signal of the symbol fluctuation meter; the signal that outputs the number of symbol fluctuations related to the first main game and the second main game; from the first main game symbol temporary stop timing and the second main game symbol temporary stop timing; This signal keeps outputting the ON signal until the fixed time ends. In the modified example 3 from the sixth embodiment, if the small hit symbol on the second main game side is won in the time shortening game state, that is, if the second main game small hit symbol is stopped, it changes. Since the fixed time becomes longer than the other cases, the output time of the signal relating to the symbol variation becomes relatively long.

Next, it is a big hit system signal; a signal that outputs that the big hit is in progress (for example, the condition device operation flag is on) is based on a small hit to the V winning opening C26 In the case of a big hit, it is the timing of detecting a ball entering the V winning opening C26, and in the case of a big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit pattern, it is the timing of turning on the condition device operation flag (on the timing of the big hit start); It turns off after outputting an on signal until it is completed (conditional device operation flag is turned on→off). It should be noted that, between the small hits won in the time-reduced game state and the small hits won in the non-time-reduced game state, the small hits completed in the time-reduced game state have a shorter demo time. Therefore, the time for outputting the external terminal signal in the small hit end demonstration time is shorter for the small hits won in the time shortened gaming state than for the small hits won in the non-time shortened gaming state. .. In addition, the same configuration can be applied to the small hit start demonstration time, that is, the small hit in the time shortened game state and the small hit in the non-time shortened game state become the time shortened game state. The small hit that was won by the short win is shorter in the small hit start demo time, and the time when the external terminal signal related to the small hit start demo time is output in the small hit start demo time is in the non-time shortened game state. It may be configured such that the short hits won in the time shortening game state are shorter than the short hits won. Also, the same configuration can be applied to the external terminal signal indicating that the jackpot is in progress, that is, the jackpot won in the time-reduced game state and the jackpot won in the non-time-reduced game state are time-reduced games. The output time of the external terminal signal indicating that the jackpot won in the state is in the jackpot may be shorter than that in the non-time reduction game state. In addition, when the big hit is won in the time reduction game state, it is in the non-time reduction game state while the big hit is being executed, and when the small hit is won in the time reduction game state, the small jackpot is being executed. It is in the time reduction game state (the time reduction game state is maintained). Further, the external terminal signal related to the information indicating that it is in the time shortened gaming state may be configured to be outputable, and the external terminal signal can be started to be output in the time shortened gaming state. It is configured to be able to continue to output the ON signal over the middle/small hit middle→time shortening game state. As described above, the time shortening game state may indicate that the opening time extension function is operating, and the non-time shortening game state indicates that the opening time extension function is not operating. Good.

Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process in Modification 3 from the sixth embodiment. The changes from the sixth embodiment are step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3) and step 2204-3 (sixth variation 3), that is, step 2204. After turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state). To judge. If Yes in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3), in step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, is the symbol variation the symbol variation on the second main game side? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), in step 2204-3 (sixth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S hides the stop display and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step 2208. In addition, in the case of No in step 2204-1 (sixth variation 3) or step 2204-2 (sixth variation 3), the processing shifts to step 2206. Thus, in the third modification from the sixth embodiment, in the non-time-reduced game state in the symbol variation of the second main game side, the non-time-reduced game state is set by hiding the variable display of the decorative symbol. Thus, the player can be configured not to perform the right-handed stroke. It should be noted that such a configuration can be applied to other embodiments, and is suitable in a case where it is not desired to perform a right hit in a non-time shortening gaming state or a non-stochastic variation gaming state.

With the above-mentioned configuration, in the gaming machine according to the modification example 3 from the sixth embodiment, the gaming state, the result of winning or losing relating to the main gaming symbol, the symbol fluctuation on the first main gaming side, or the second principal It is possible to output the signal to the outside of the gaming machine properly by configuring so that the variable fixed time may differ depending on whether it is a symbol fluctuation on the game side or the like, and by making it possible to output an external terminal signal related to the variable fixed time. Will be possible.

Next, referring to the external terminal transmission content determination table 2 in FIG. 104, the transmission signal to the external relay terminal board applicable to this example will be described. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures in case of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

First, the external output signal of the signal number 3 can be applied to a gaming machine that can shift to the probability varying game state after the special game ends by entering the specific area C22 in the special winning opening. It is a big hit system signal; the second big winning opening (attacker) C20 provided with a specific area C22 which is a ball entering area for determining whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state is shortly opened (for example, maximum opening time. It is a state in which the sorting game execution round which is a round is being executed (the special electric auditors product is operating), and the detection of a ball entering the specific area C22 is valid. At the time, the signal for outputting that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is; a round in which the second special winning opening C20 is shortly opened is being executed, and the detection of entering the specific area C22 is effective. It is a signal that keeps outputting the ON signal for 1 second from the timing when the game ball enters the specific area C22 when it is in the state. In addition, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the distribution game execution round in which the second special winning opening C20 is long opened, the external terminal signal is not output. That is, the long open big hit and the short open big hit are configured such that the presence or absence of the output of the external terminal signal when entering the specific area C22 is different. In addition, it is preferable that the external terminal signal is not output except for the first one that satisfies the above output timing during the execution of one special game.

Next, the external output signal of the signal number 3 can be applied to the gaming machine in which the big hit can be started after the small hit game is finished by entering the V winning opening C27 in the big prize opening. It is a signal of the additional external terminal system; the signal that outputs that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 during the small hitting game in the non-time shortening gaming state is; in the small hitting game in the non-time shortening gaming state. From the timing when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 within the V winning opening valid period; 0.200 seconds on → 0.200 seconds off.

Next, FIG. 105 is an example of the configuration of the electric accessory opening time applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. In the figure, when the big hit symbol stops or the small hit symbol stops and the big hit or small hit starts during the change of the auxiliary game symbol, and then the auxiliary game symbol stops during the execution of the big hit or the small hit. It is illustrated.
(1) <When the big hit symbol stops in the non-time reduction game state>
If the big hit symbol is stopped in the non-time reduction game state during the change of the auxiliary game symbol, the non-time reduction game state is maintained even if the big hit symbol is stopped, and the change is in progress during the execution of the big hit. When the auxiliary game symbol is stopped by the hit symbol, the mode of opening the electric accessory is relatively short (0.2 seconds open→closed).
(2) <When the big hit symbol stops in the time saving game state>
If the big hit symbol stopped in the time shortening game state during the change of the auxiliary game symbol, it shifts to the non-time shortening game state because the big hit symbol stopped, and was changing during the big hit execution. When the auxiliary game symbol is stopped by the hit symbol, the mode of opening the electric accessory is relatively short (0.2 seconds open→closed).
(3) <When the small hit symbol stops in the non-time reduction game state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the non-time reduction game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the non-time reduction game state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped, and the variation occurs during execution of the small hit. When the auxiliary game symbol that was in the middle stops at the hit symbol, the opening mode of the electric accessory becomes relatively short (0.2 seconds open→closed).
(4) <When the small hit symbol stops in the time-saving game state>
If the small hit symbol is stopped in the time shortening game state while the auxiliary game symbol is changing, the time shortening game state is maintained even if the small hit symbol is stopped, and during the change while the small hit is being executed. When the auxiliary game symbol that has been stopped is a hit symbol, the mode of opening the electric accessory becomes relatively long (0.2 second open→0.8 closed→4 second→closed).

Next, FIG. 106 is a configuration example in the case where a small hit is won in the final variation of the time reduction game state according to the present example. For example, if the game shifts to the time-reduced game state 100 times after the jackpot, the 100th rotation after the jackpot is the final variation of the time-reduced game state.
<Structure 1>
Under the situation that the main game short time flag is on, the small hit symbol may be stopped, and the main game short time flag may be turned off at the stop timing of the small hit symbol.
<Structure 2>
Under the situation that the main game short time flag is on, the small hit symbol stops, the main game short time flag remains on at the stop timing of the small hit symbol, and the small hit game related to the small hit symbol starts, The main game time saving flag may be turned off at the timing when the small hit game ends.

In the gaming machine according to the present example, when the small hit is won while the main game probability variation flag is on, the main game probability variation flag remains on during the small hit execution, and the main game When the big variation is won while the probability variation flag is on, the main game probability variation flag is turned off during the execution of the big hit.

Further, in examples other than the modified example 1 from the sixth embodiment and the modified example 2 from the sixth embodiment in the gaming machine according to the present example, a small hit is won in a state where the main game shortened flag is on. In this case, the main game time saving flag remains on during the small hit execution, and when the big hit is won while the main game saving time flag is on, the main game time saving occurs during the big hit execution. The flag is configured to be off.

Next, FIG. 107 is an example of a notice effect according to this example. As shown in the figure, in this example, there are a plurality of types of notice effects that can be executed, and there are notice effects in which a big hit is definite, notice effects in which a small hit is definite, and the like. Further, while there is no notice effect denying the big hit, there are a plurality of notice effects denying the small hit, such as "serif notice (rainbow)". That is, there are more notice effects that deny a small hit than there are notice effects that deny a big hit.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) By entering the specific area C22 during the special game, the probability variation game state is entered after the end of the special game.
(2) The proportion of the big hits (the second main game length open big hits) in which the special winning opening is long open in the distribution game execution round of the second main game special games is the distribution of the first main game special games. It is higher than the percentage of big hits (first main game length open big hits) that the big winning opening is long open in the game execution round.
(3) When the long open big hit is won in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the time shortening game is finished after the long open big hit. Transition to state (or easy transition).
(4) When the long open big hit is won in the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state, and the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the non-time shortening game state is reached after the long open big hit ends. (Or easy to move).
(4) When the small hit on the first main game side is won in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state are transferred after the end of the small hit.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 1st main gaming timer, MP11t-C2 2nd main gaming timer MP22t-B 2nd main game Starting mouth electric accessory release timer, MP33c winning ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP51c probability variation counter MP52c time reduction counter, MN52c limited frequency counter MP41t small hitting game timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer A 1st main game peripheral Equipment A10 1st main game start mouth, A11s 1st main game start entrance ball detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display section A21h 1st main game symbol reservation indicator section, B 2nd Main game peripheral equipment B10 2nd main game start mouth, B11s 2nd main game start mouth ball detector B11d 2nd main game start mouth electric auditors, B20 2nd main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display section , B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display section C 1st and 2nd main game common peripheral device, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening electric prize C20 2nd Special winning opening, C21s Second winning opening winning detection device C21d Second winning opening electric accessory, C22 Specific area C23 Second winning opening outlet, C23s Second winning opening ejection detecting device C24 Top shielding member, C25 Lower shield member C27 V winning opening, C27s V winning opening ball detection device C20-1 Box-shaped member H auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 auxiliary game starting opening H11s auxiliary game starting opening ball detecting device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM21t design variation time management timer, SM26c look-ahead production execution counter SM23c stay stage management counter, SM23c2 number of consecutive games counter SM24t power-on timer SS production display means (sub-sub control unit), SG production display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative pattern display Area, SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection device, KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined ball entrance and can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when a game ball is moved to the predetermined ball entrance when compared with when it is displaced to the closed state when it is displaced to the open state. A variable member that is easy to enter or can enter, and that when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is difficult or impossible to enter the game ball into the predetermined inlet compared to when it is displaced to the open state. When,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, the identification information display control means for controlling the identification information display unit to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the variable winning a prize hole may be in an advantageous state for the player until a specific number of balls enter the variable winning a prize hole or a specific period elapses. It is provided with a special game control means capable of executing a variable winning opening opening game for executing a unit game once,
The gaming state relating to the ease of opening the variable member has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific game state in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game state after the execution of the variable winning opening opening game becomes the normal game state. Is configured,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A of the stop display modes belonging to the specific group in the specific game state, the specific condition can be satisfied,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode B of the stop display modes belonging to a specific group in the specific game state, the specific condition is not satisfied.

Images